--- /dev/null
+;;; -*-emacs-lisp-*-
+
+(setq skel-alist
+ (append
+ '((author . "Mark Wooding")
+ (full-title . "the Common Files Distribution (`common')")
+ (Program . "`Common'")
+ (program . "`common'"))
+ skel-alist))
--- /dev/null
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+\f
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+\f
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+\f
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+\f
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+\f
+ Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+ <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+ Copyright (C) 19yy <name of author>
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
+ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+ <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
--- /dev/null
+ GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is
+ numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+ This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
+other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
+your libraries, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
+you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
+with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+ Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
+the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+ Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
+version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
+the original authors' reputations.
+\f
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
+software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
+transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this,
+we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
+free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
+GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary
+one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
+the same as in the ordinary license.
+
+ The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
+they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
+program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without
+changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
+analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in
+a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
+derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
+treats it as such.
+
+ Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
+Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
+sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We
+concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+ However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
+users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
+libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to
+permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
+preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
+libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve
+this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
+changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this
+will lead to faster development of free libraries.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
+former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
+works together with the library.
+
+ Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
+General Public License rather than by this special one.
+\f
+ GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is
+addressed as "you".
+
+ A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
+Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term "modification".)
+
+ "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+\f
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+ b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+ charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+ table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+ the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+ is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+ in the event an application does not supply such function or
+ table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+ its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+ (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+ a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+ application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+ application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+ be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+ root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+\f
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+ 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
+library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+\f
+ 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+ a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+ changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+ Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+ with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
+ uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
+ user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+ executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
+ that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+ Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+ to use the modified definitions.)
+
+ b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+ least three years, to give the same user the materials
+ specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+ than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+ c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+ from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+ specified materials from the same place.
+
+ d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+ materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+\f
+ 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+ a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+ based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+ facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+ Sections above.
+
+ b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+ that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+ where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+ 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+ 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+\f
+ 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+ 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+\f
+ 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+\f
+ Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+ If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+ To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+ <one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+ Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
+
+ This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+ License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ Library General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+ License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
+ Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston,
+ MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+ library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
+
+ <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+That's all there is to it!
--- /dev/null
+Basic Installation
+==================
+
+ These are generic installation instructions.
+
+ The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
+various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses
+those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package.
+It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent
+definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that
+you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file
+`config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up
+reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output
+(useful mainly for debugging `configure').
+
+ If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
+to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
+diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can
+be considered for the next release. If at some point `config.cache'
+contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
+
+ The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program
+called `autoconf'. You only need `configure.in' if you want to change
+it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'.
+
+The simplest way to compile this package is:
+
+ 1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
+ `./configure' to configure the package for your system. If you're
+ using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type
+ `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute
+ `configure' itself.
+
+ Running `configure' takes a while. While running, it prints some
+ messages telling which features it is checking for.
+
+ 2. Type `make' to compile the package.
+
+ 3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with
+ the package.
+
+ 4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and
+ documentation.
+
+ 5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
+ source code directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the
+ files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for
+ a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. There is
+ also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
+ for the package's developers. If you use it, you may have to get
+ all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
+ with the distribution.
+
+Compilers and Options
+=====================
+
+ Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that
+the `configure' script does not know about. You can give `configure'
+initial values for variables by setting them in the environment. Using
+a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like
+this:
+ CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure
+
+Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this:
+ env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure
+
+Compiling For Multiple Architectures
+====================================
+
+ You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
+same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
+own directory. To do this, you must use a version of `make' that
+supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'. `cd' to the
+directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
+the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the
+source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'.
+
+ If you have to use a `make' that does not supports the `VPATH'
+variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time
+in the source code directory. After you have installed the package for
+one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another
+architecture.
+
+Installation Names
+==================
+
+ By default, `make install' will install the package's files in
+`/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc. You can specify an
+installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the
+option `--prefix=PATH'.
+
+ You can specify separate installation prefixes for
+architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you
+give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use
+PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
+Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix.
+
+ If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
+with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the
+option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
+
+Optional Features
+=================
+
+ Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to
+`configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
+They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
+is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The
+`README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the
+package recognizes.
+
+ For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually
+find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
+you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and
+`--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
+
+Specifying the System Type
+==========================
+
+ There may be some features `configure' can not figure out
+automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package
+will run on. Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints
+a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the
+`--host=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system
+type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields:
+ CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
+
+See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If
+`config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
+need to know the host type.
+
+ If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also
+use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will
+produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of
+system on which you are compiling the package.
+
+Sharing Defaults
+================
+
+ If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share,
+you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives
+default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'.
+`configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
+`PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the
+`CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
+A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script.
+
+Operation Controls
+==================
+
+ `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it
+operates.
+
+`--cache-file=FILE'
+ Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of
+ `./config.cache'. Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for
+ debugging `configure'.
+
+`--help'
+ Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit.
+
+`--quiet'
+`--silent'
+`-q'
+ Do not print messages saying which checks are being made.
+
+`--srcdir=DIR'
+ Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually
+ `configure' can determine that directory automatically.
+
+`--version'
+ Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure'
+ script, and exit.
+
+`configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options.
+
--- /dev/null
+## Process this file with Automake to generate `Makefile.in'
+## -*-Makefile-*-
+##
+## $Id: Makefile.am,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+##
+## Building the distribution
+##
+## (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+##
+
+##----- Licensing notice ----------------------------------------------------
+##
+## This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common')
+##
+## `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+## (at your option) any later version.
+##
+## `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+## but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+## GNU General Public License for more details.
+##
+## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+## along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+## Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+##----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------
+##
+## $Log: Makefile.am,v $
+## Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+## Initial revision
+##
+
+## --- Options ---
+
+AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = foreign
+
+## --- What needs building ---
+
+bin_SCRIPTS = mklinks findlinks txtlib mkaclocal
+
+## --- Files to install in the repository ---
+
+pkgdata_DATA = \
+ COPYING COPYING.LIB INSTALL \
+ ansi2knr.1 ansi2knr.c \
+ gpl.tex lgpl.tex gpl.texi lgpl.texi texinfo.tex texinice.tex \
+ aclocal.glob \
+ mdwopt.c mdwopt.h
+
+EXTRA_DIST = $(pkgdata_DATA)
+
+pkgdata_SCRIPTS = \
+ config.guess config.sub elisp-comp install-sh \
+ mdate-sh missing mkinstalldirs ylwrap
+
+## --- Documentation ---
+
+info_TEXINFOS = common.texi
+
+## --- Cleaning up ---
+
+CLEANFILES = $(bin_SCRIPTS)
--- /dev/null
+dnl -*-fundamental-*- *@--GLOB-HEADER--@*
+dnl
+dnl $Id: aclocal.glob,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+dnl
+dnl Common library of autoconf macros
+dnl
+dnl (c) 1997 Mark Wooding, except for macros and documentation where noted.
+dnl
+
+dnl----- Licensing notice ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common')
+dnl
+dnl `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+dnl (at your option) any later version.
+dnl
+dnl `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+dnl GNU General Public License for more details.
+dnl
+dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+dnl along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+dnl Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+dnl----- Revision history ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl $Log: aclocal.glob,v $
+dnl Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+dnl Initial revision
+dnl
+
+dnl----- Common files distribution --------------------------- *@--NOTICE--@*
+dnl
+dnl $Id: aclocal.glob,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+
+dnl --- *@-AC_PROG_CC_STDC-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AC_PROG_CC_STDC
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: If the C compiler in not in ANSI C mode by default, try to
+dnl add an option to output variable `CC' to make it so. This
+dnl macro tries various options that select ANSI C on some system
+dnl or another. It considers the compiler to be in ANSI C mode
+dnl if it defines `__STDC__' to 1 and handles function prototypes
+dnl correctly.
+dnl
+dnl If you use this macro, you should check after calling it
+dnl whether the C compiler has been set to accept ANSI C; if not,
+dnl the shell variable `ac_cv_prog_cc_stdc' is set to `no'. If
+dnl you wrote your source code in ANSI C, you can make an
+dnl un-ANSIfied copy of it by using the program `ansi2knr', which
+dnl comes with Ghostscript.
+dnl
+dnl (documentation by Franc,ois Pinard)
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_CC_STDC,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
+AC_BEFORE([$0], [AC_C_INLINE])
+AC_BEFORE([$0], [AC_C_CONST])
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(for ${CC-cc} option to accept ANSI C)
+AC_CACHE_VAL(am_cv_prog_cc_stdc,
+[am_cv_prog_cc_stdc=no
+ac_save_CC="$CC"
+# Don't try gcc -ansi; that turns off useful extensions and
+# breaks some systems' header files.
+# AIX -qlanglvl=ansi
+# Ultrix and OSF/1 -std1
+# HP-UX -Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE
+# SVR4 -Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__
+for ac_arg in "" -qlanglvl=ansi -std1 "-Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "-Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__"
+do
+ CC="$ac_save_CC $ac_arg"
+ AC_TRY_COMPILE(
+[#if !defined(__STDC__) || __STDC__ != 1
+choke me
+#endif
+/* DYNIX/ptx V4.1.3 can't compile sys/stat.h with -Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__. */
+#ifdef _SEQUENT_
+# include <sys/types.h>
+# include <sys/stat.h>
+#endif
+], [
+int test (int i, double x);
+struct s1 {int (*f) (int a);};
+struct s2 {int (*f) (double a);};],
+[am_cv_prog_cc_stdc="$ac_arg"; break])
+done
+CC="$ac_save_CC"
+])
+if test -z "$am_cv_prog_cc_stdc"; then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT([none needed])
+else
+ AC_MSG_RESULT($am_cv_prog_cc_stdc)
+fi
+case "x$am_cv_prog_cc_stdc" in
+ x|xno) ;;
+ *) CC="$CC $am_cv_prog_cc_stdc" ;;
+esac
+])
+
+dnl----- AutoMake macros ------------------------------------- *@--IGNORE--@*
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_CONDITIONAL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_CONDITIONAL(NAME, TEST)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: NAME = name of the conditional
+dnl TEST = a shell list to execute
+dnl
+dnl Use: Allows conditional sections in Makefiles.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_CONDITIONAL,
+[AC_SUBST($1_TRUE)
+AC_SUBST($1_FALSE)
+if $2; then
+ $1_TRUE=
+ $1_FALSE='#'
+else
+ $1_TRUE='#'
+ $1_FALSE=
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_CYGWIN32-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Cygnus (I guess)
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_CYGWIN32
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Check to see if we're running under Cygwin32, without using
+dnl AC_CANONICAL_*. If so, set output variable EXEEXT to
+dnl ".exe". Otherwise set it to "".
+
+dnl AM_CYGWIN32()
+dnl You might think we can do this by checking for a cygwin32-specific
+dnl cpp define. We can't, because cross-compilers that target
+dnl cygwin32 don't use the .exe suffix. I don't know why.
+AC_DEFUN(AM_CYGWIN32,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for Cygwin32 environment, am_cv_cygwin32,
+[cat > conftest.$ac_ext << 'EOF'
+int main () {
+/* Nothing. */
+return 0; }
+EOF
+if AC_TRY_EVAL(ac_link) && test -s conftest.exe; then
+ am_cv_cygwin32=yes
+else
+ am_cv_cygwin32=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*])
+EXEEXT=
+test "$am_cv_cygwin32" = yes && EXEEXT=.exe
+AC_SUBST(EXEEXT)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_WITH_DMALLOC-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_WITH_DMALLOC
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Links with `-dmalloc' if told to by the user.
+
+## ----------------------------------- ##
+## Check if --with-dmalloc was given. ##
+## From Franc,ois Pinard ##
+## ----------------------------------- ##
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_WITH_DMALLOC,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING(if malloc debugging is wanted)
+AC_ARG_WITH(dmalloc,
+[ --with-dmalloc use dmalloc, as in
+ ftp://ftp.letters.com/src/dmalloc/dmalloc.tar.gz],
+[if test "$withval" = yes; then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+ AC_DEFINE(WITH_DMALLOC)
+ LIBS="$LIBS -ldmalloc"
+ LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -g"
+else
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+fi], [AC_MSG_RESULT(no)])
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Use this if you use the GNU error.[ch].
+
+dnl FIXME: Migrate into libit
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for error_at_line], am_cv_lib_error_at_line,
+ [AC_TRY_LINK([],[error_at_line(0, 0, "", 0, "");],
+ am_cv_lib_error_at_line=yes,
+ am_cv_lib_error_at_line=no)])
+ if test $am_cv_lib_error_at_line = no; then
+ LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS error.o"
+ fi
+ AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE(MODNAME)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: MODNAME = value to initialise `module' variable with
+dnl
+dnl Use: This macro will automatically get the guile version from the
+dnl top-level srcdir, and will initialize automake. It also
+dnl defines the `module' variable.
+
+AC_DEFUN([AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE],[
+. $srcdir/../GUILE-VERSION
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE($PACKAGE, $VERSION)
+AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR(..)
+module=[$1]
+AC_SUBST(module)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_CONFIG_HEADER-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_CONFIG_HEADER(HEADER ...)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: HEADER = a header spec, as for AC_CONFIG_HEADER
+dnl
+dnl Use: Like AC_CONFIG_HEADER, but automatically create stamp file.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_CONFIG_HEADER,
+[AC_PREREQ([2.12])
+AC_CONFIG_HEADER([$1])
+dnl When config.status generates a header, we must update the stamp-h file.
+dnl This file resides in the same directory as the config header
+dnl that is generated. We must strip everything past the first ":",
+dnl and everything past the last "/".
+AC_OUTPUT_COMMANDS(changequote(<<,>>)dnl
+ifelse(patsubst(<<$1>>, <<[^ ]>>, <<>>), <<>>,
+<<test -z "<<$>>CONFIG_HEADERS" || echo timestamp > patsubst(<<$1>>, <<^\([^:]*/
+\)?.*>>, <<\1>>)stamp-h<<>>dnl>>,
+<<am_indx=1
+for am_file in <<$1>>; do
+ case " <<$>>CONFIG_HEADERS " in
+ *" <<$>>am_file "*<<)>>
+ echo timestamp > `echo <<$>>am_file | sed -e 's%:.*%%' -e 's%[^/]*$%%'`stamp-h$am_indx
+ ;;
+ esac
+ am_indx=`expr "<<$>>am_indx" + 1`
+done<<>>dnl>>)
+changequote([,]))])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE-@*
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(PACKAGE, VERSION, [NO-DEFINE])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: PACKAGE = package name
+dnl VERSION = version number
+dnl NO-DEFINE = if set, don't define package and version number
+dnl
+dnl Use: Do all the work for Automake. This macro actually does too
+dnl much -- some checks are only needed if your package does
+dnl certain things. But this isn't really a big deal.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL])
+PACKAGE=[$1]
+AC_SUBST(PACKAGE)
+VERSION=[$2]
+AC_SUBST(VERSION)
+dnl test to see if srcdir already configured
+if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`" && test -f $srcdir/config.status; then
+ AC_MSG_ERROR([source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first])
+fi
+ifelse([$3],,
+AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE")
+AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION"))
+AM_SANITY_CHECK
+AC_ARG_PROGRAM
+dnl FIXME This is truly gross.
+missing_dir=`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd`
+AM_MISSING_PROG(ACLOCAL, aclocal, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOCONF, autoconf, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOMAKE, automake, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOHEADER, autoheader, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(MAKEINFO, makeinfo, $missing_dir)
+AC_PROG_MAKE_SET])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_INSTALL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_PROG_INSTALL
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Calls `AC_PROG_INSTALL' to find an installer. Then it sets
+dnl `INSTALL_SCRIPT' to a suitable value if necessary.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_INSTALL,
+[AC_PROG_INSTALL
+test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL} -m 755'
+AC_SUBST(INSTALL_SCRIPT)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_LEX-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Alexandre Oliva
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_PROG_LEX
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Replacement for AC_PROG_LEX and AC_DECL_YYTEXT
+
+dnl AM_PROG_LEX
+dnl Look for flex, lex or missing, then run AC_PROG_LEX and AC_DECL_YYTEXT
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_LEX,
+[missing_dir=ifelse([$1],,`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd`,$1)
+AC_CHECK_PROGS(LEX, flex lex, "$missing_dir/missing flex")
+AC_PROG_LEX
+AC_DECL_YYTEXT])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_LIBTOOL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_PROG_LIBTOOL
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Configures `libtool' for the target architecture.
+
+##
+## Configure libtool for the target system.
+##
+# serial 1 AM_PROG_LIBTOOL
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_LIBTOOL,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AC_CANONICAL_HOST])
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_RANLIB])
+
+# Always use our own libtool.
+LIBTOOL='$(top_builddir)/libtool'
+AC_SUBST(LIBTOOL)
+
+dnl Allow the --disable-shared flag to stop us from building shared libs.
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(shared,
+[ --enable-shared build shared libraries [default=yes]],
+test "$enableval" = no && libtool_shared=" --disable-shared",
+libtool_shared=)
+
+libtool_flags="$libtool_shared"
+test "$silent" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --silent"
+test "$ac_cv_prog_gcc" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --with-gcc"
+
+# Actually configure libtool. ac_aux_dir is where install-sh is found.
+CC="$CC" CFLAGS="$CFLAGS" CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS" LD="$LD" RANLIB="$RANLIB" \
+$ac_aux_dir/ltconfig $libtool_flags --no-verify $ac_aux_dir/ltmain.sh $host \
+|| AC_MSG_ERROR([libtool configure failed])
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PATH_LISPDIR-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Ulrich Drepper
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_PATH_LISPDIR
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Sets the variable `lispdir' to point to a place to install
+dnl Emacs lisp files.
+
+## ------------------------
+## Emacs LISP file handling
+## From Ulrich Drepper
+## ------------------------
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PATH_LISPDIR,
+ [# If set to t, that means we are running in a shell under Emacs.
+ # If you have an Emacs named "t", then use the full path.
+ test "$EMACS" = t && EMACS=
+ AC_PATH_PROG(EMACS, emacs xemacs, no)
+ if test $EMACS != "no"; then
+ AC_MSG_CHECKING([where .elc files should go])
+ dnl Set default value
+ lispdir="\$(datadir)/emacs/site-lisp"
+ if test "x$prefix" = "xNONE"; then
+ if test -d $ac_default_prefix/share/emacs/site-lisp; then
+ lispdir="\$(prefix)/share/emacs/site-lisp"
+ else
+ if test -d $ac_default_prefix/lib/emacs/site-lisp; then
+ lispdir="\$(prefix)/lib/emacs/site-lisp"
+ fi
+ fi
+ else
+ if test -d $prefix/share/emacs/site-lisp; then
+ lispdir="\$(prefix)/share/emacs/site-lisp"
+ else
+ if test -d $prefix/lib/emacs/site-lisp; then
+ lispdir="\$(prefix)/lib/emacs/site-lisp"
+ fi
+ fi
+ fi
+ AC_MSG_RESULT($lispdir)
+ fi
+ AC_SUBST(lispdir)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_MAINTAINTER_MODE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: jm_MAINTAINER_MODE
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Provides an option `--enable-maintainer-mode' which turns
+dnl on rules which might normally be commented out. The
+dnl substitution variable `MAINT' is set to be a comment when
+dnl this option is disabled, which it is by default.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_MAINTAINER_MODE,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to enable maintainer-specific portions of Makefiles])
+ dnl maintainer-mode is disabled by default
+ AC_ARG_ENABLE(maintainer-mode,
+[ --enable-maintainer-mode enable make rules and dependencies not useful
+ (and sometimes confusing) to the casual installer],
+ USE_MAINTAINER_MODE=$enableval,
+ USE_MAINTAINER_MODE=no)
+ AC_MSG_RESULT($USE_MAINTAINER_MODE)
+ if test $USE_MAINTAINER_MODE = yes; then
+ MAINT=
+ else
+ MAINT='#M#'
+ fi
+ AC_SUBST(MAINT)dnl
+]
+)
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_MISSING_PROG-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_MISSING_PROG(NAME, PROGRAM, DIRECTORY)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: NAME = variable to set to the file's location
+dnl PROGRAM = name of program to find
+dnl DIRECTORY = directory to look in
+dnl
+dnl Use: Fakes existence of a useful GNU maintainer tool.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_MISSING_PROG,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING(for working $2)
+# Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if
+# an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected.
+# Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh.
+if ($2 --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+ $1=$2
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(found)
+else
+ $1="$3/missing $2"
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(missing)
+fi
+AC_SUBST($1)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_MKTIME-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_MKTIME
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Checks for a working mktime function.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_MKTIME,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AC_HEADER_TIME])dnl
+ AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/time.h)
+ AC_CACHE_CHECK([for working mktime], am_cv_func_working_mktime,
+ [AC_TRY_RUN(
+changequote(<<, >>)dnl
+<</* Test program from Paul Eggert (eggert@twinsun.com)
+ and Tony Leneis (tony@plaza.ds.adp.com). */
+#if TIME_WITH_SYS_TIME
+# include <sys/time.h>
+# include <time.h>
+#else
+# if HAVE_SYS_TIME_H
+# include <sys/time.h>
+# else
+# include <time.h>
+# endif
+#endif
+
+static time_t time_t_max;
+
+/* Values we'll use to set the TZ environment variable. */
+static const char *const tz_strings[] = {
+ NULL, "GMT0", "JST-9", "EST+3EDT+2,M10.1.0/00:00:00,M2.3.0/00:00:00"
+};
+#define N_STRINGS (sizeof (tz_strings) / sizeof (tz_strings[0]))
+
+static void
+mktime_test (now)
+ time_t now;
+{
+ if (mktime (localtime (&now)) != now)
+ exit (1);
+ now = time_t_max - now;
+ if (mktime (localtime (&now)) != now)
+ exit (1);
+}
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+ time_t t, delta;
+ int i;
+
+ for (time_t_max = 1; 0 < time_t_max; time_t_max *= 2)
+ continue;
+ time_t_max--;
+ delta = time_t_max / 997; /* a suitable prime number */
+ for (i = 0; i < N_STRINGS; i++)
+ {
+ if (tz_strings[i])
+ putenv (tz_strings[i]);
+
+ for (t = 0; t <= time_t_max - delta; t += delta)
+ mktime_test (t);
+ mktime_test ((time_t) 60 * 60);
+ mktime_test ((time_t) 60 * 60 * 24);
+ }
+ exit (0);
+}
+ >>,
+changequote([, ])dnl
+ am_cv_func_working_mktime=yes, am_cv_func_working_mktime=no,
+ dnl When crosscompiling, assume mktime is missing or broken.
+ am_cv_func_working_mktime=no)
+ ])
+ if test $am_cv_func_working_mktime = no; then
+ LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS mktime.o"
+ fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_OBSTACK-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_OBSTACK
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Checks for GNU obstacks.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_OBSTACK,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for obstacks], am_cv_func_obstack,
+ [AC_TRY_LINK([#include "obstack.h"],
+ [struct obstack *mem;obstack_free(mem,(char *) 0)],
+ am_cv_func_obstack=yes,
+ am_cv_func_obstack=no)])
+ if test $am_cv_func_obstack = yes; then
+ AC_DEFINE(HAVE_OBSTACK)
+ else
+ LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS obstack.o"
+ fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AC_C_PROTOTYPES-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AC_C_PROTOTYPES
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: If the C compiler understands ANSI C, define `PROTOTYPES',
+dnl and clear the `U' and `ANSI2KNR' variables. Otherwise,
+dnl set `U' to be `_' and `ANSI2KNR' to be `./ansi2knr'.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(fp_C_PROTOTYPES,
+[AC_REQUIRE([fp_PROG_CC_STDC])
+AC_MSG_CHECKING([for function prototypes])
+if test "$ac_cv_prog_cc_stdc" != no; then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+ AC_DEFINE(PROTOTYPES)
+ U= ANSI2KNR=
+else
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+ U=_ ANSI2KNR=./ansi2knr
+fi
+AC_SUBST(U)dnl
+AC_SUBST(ANSI2KNR)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PATH_GTK-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Owen Taylor
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_PATH_GTK(MIN-VERSION, [ACTION-IF-FOUND], [ACTION-IF-NOT])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: MIN-VERSION = minimum version of GTK required
+dnl ACTION-IF-FOUND = executed if GTK found OK
+dnl ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do if GTK not available
+dnl
+dnl Use: Sets up compilation environment suitably for GTK programming.
+
+# Configure paths for GTK+
+# Owen Taylor 97-11-3
+
+dnl AM_PATH_GTK([MINIMUM-VERSION, [ACTION-IF-FOUND [, ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND]]])
+dnl Test for GTK, and define GTK_CFLAGS and GTK_LIBS
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PATH_GTK,
+[dnl
+dnl Get the cflags and libraries from the gtk-config script
+dnl
+AC_ARG_WITH(gtk-prefix,[ --with-gtk-prefix=PFX Prefix where GTK is installed (optional)],
+ gtk_config_prefix="$withval", gtk_config_prefix="")
+AC_ARG_WITH(gtk-exec-prefix,[ --with-gtk-exec-prefix=PFX Exec prefix where GTK is installed (optional)],
+ gtk_config_exec_prefix="$withval", gtk_config_exec_prefix="")
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(gtktest, [ --disable-gtktest Do not try to compile and run a test GTK program],
+ , enable_gtktest=yes)
+
+ if test x$gtk_config_exec_prefix != x ; then
+ gtk_config_args="$gtk_config_args --exec-prefix=$gtk_config_exec_prefix"
+ if test x${GTK_CONFIG+set} != xset ; then
+ GTK_CONFIG=$gtk_config_exec_prefix/bin/gtk-config
+ fi
+ fi
+ if test x$gtk_config_prefix != x ; then
+ gtk_config_args="$gtk_config_args --prefix=$gtk_config_prefix"
+ if test x${GTK_CONFIG+set} != xset ; then
+ GTK_CONFIG=$gtk_config_prefix/bin/gtk-config
+ fi
+ fi
+
+ AC_PATH_PROG(GTK_CONFIG, gtk-config, no)
+ min_gtk_version=ifelse([$1], ,0.99.7,$1)
+ AC_MSG_CHECKING(for GTK - version >= $min_gtk_version)
+ no_gtk=""
+ if test "$GTK_CONFIG" = "no" ; then
+ no_gtk=yes
+ else
+ GTK_CFLAGS=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --cflags`
+ GTK_LIBS=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --libs`
+ gtk_config_major_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \
+ sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\1/'`
+ gtk_config_minor_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \
+ sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\2/'`
+ gtk_config_micro_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \
+ sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\3/'`
+ if test "x$enable_gtktest" = "xyes" ; then
+ ac_save_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+ ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+ CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $GTK_CFLAGS"
+ LIBS="$LIBS $GTK_LIBS"
+dnl
+dnl Now check if the installed GTK is sufficiently new. (Also sanity
+dnl checks the results of gtk-config to some extent
+dnl
+ rm -f conf.gtktest
+ AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+ int major, minor, micro;
+ char *tmp_version;
+
+ system ("touch conf.gtktest");
+
+ /* HP/UX 9 (%@#!) writes to sscanf strings */
+ tmp_version = g_strdup("$min_gtk_version");
+ if (sscanf(tmp_version, "%d.%d.%d", &major, &minor, µ) != 3) {
+ printf("%s, bad version string\n", "$min_gtk_version");
+ exit(1);
+ }
+
+ if ((gtk_major_version != $gtk_config_major_version) ||
+ (gtk_minor_version != $gtk_config_minor_version) ||
+ (gtk_micro_version != $gtk_config_micro_version))
+ {
+ printf("\n*** 'gtk-config --version' returned %d.%d.%d, but GTK+ (%d.%d.%d)\n",
+ $gtk_config_major_version, $gtk_config_minor_version, $gtk_config_micro_version,
+ gtk_major_version, gtk_minor_version, gtk_micro_version);
+ printf ("*** was found! If gtk-config was correct, then it is best\n");
+ printf ("*** to remove the old version of GTK+. You may also be able to fix the error\n");
+ printf("*** by modifying your LD_LIBRARY_PATH enviroment variable, or by editing\n");
+ printf("*** /etc/ld.so.conf. Make sure you have run ldconfig if that is\n");
+ printf("*** required on your system.\n");
+ printf("*** If gtk-config was wrong, set the environment variable GTK_CONFIG\n");
+ printf("*** to point to the correct copy of gtk-config, and remove the file config.cache\n");
+ printf("*** before re-running configure\n");
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if ((gtk_major_version > major) ||
+ ((gtk_major_version == major) && (gtk_minor_version > minor)) ||
+ ((gtk_major_version == major) && (gtk_minor_version == minor) && (gtk_micro_version >= micro)))
+ {
+ return 0;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ printf("\n*** An old version of GTK+ (%d.%d.%d) was found.\n",
+ gtk_major_version, gtk_minor_version, gtk_micro_version);
+ printf("*** You need a version of GTK+ newer than %d.%d.%d. The latest version of\n",
+ major, minor, micro);
+ printf("*** GTK+ is always available from ftp://ftp.gtk.org.\n");
+ printf("***\n");
+ printf("*** If you have already installed a sufficiently new version, this error\n");
+ printf("*** probably means that the wrong copy of the gtk-config shell script is\n");
+ printf("*** being found. The easiest way to fix this is to remove the old version\n");
+ printf("*** of GTK+, but you can also set the GTK_CONFIG environment to point to the\n");
+ printf("*** correct copy of gtk-config. (In this case, you will have to\n");
+ printf("*** modify your LD_LIBRARY_PATH enviroment variable, or edit /etc/ld.so.conf\n");
+ printf("*** so that the correct libraries are found at run-time))\n");
+ }
+ }
+ return 1;
+}
+],, no_gtk=yes,[echo $ac_n "cross compiling; assumed OK... $ac_c"])
+ CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS"
+ LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+ fi
+ fi
+ if test "x$no_gtk" = x ; then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+ ifelse([$2], , :, [$2])
+ else
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+ if test "$GTK_CONFIG" = "no" ; then
+ echo "*** The gtk-config script installed by GTK could not be found"
+ echo "*** If GTK was installed in PREFIX, make sure PREFIX/bin is in"
+ echo "*** your path, or set the GTK_CONFIG environment variable to the"
+ echo "*** full path to gtk-config."
+ else
+ if test -f conf.gtktest ; then
+ :
+ else
+ echo "*** Could not run GTK test program, checking why..."
+ CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $GTK_CFLAGS"
+ LIBS="$LIBS $GTK_LIBS"
+ AC_TRY_LINK([
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+], [ return ((gtk_major_version) || (gtk_minor_version) || (gtk_micro_version)); ],
+ [ echo "*** The test program compiled, but did not run. This usually means"
+ echo "*** that the run-time linker is not finding GTK or finding the wrong"
+ echo "*** version of GTK. If it is not finding GTK, you'll need to set your"
+ echo "*** LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable, or edit /etc/ld.so.conf to point"
+ echo "*** to the installed location Also, make sure you have run ldconfig if that"
+ echo "*** is required on your system"
+ echo "***"
+ echo "*** If you have an old version installed, it is best to remove it, although"
+ echo "*** you may also be able to get things to work by modifying LD_LIBRARY_PATH"
+ echo "***"
+ echo "*** If you have a RedHat 5.0 system, you should remove the GTK package that"
+ echo "*** came with the system with the command"
+ echo "***"
+ echo "*** rpm --erase --nodeps gtk gtk-devel" ],
+ [ echo "*** The test program failed to compile or link. See the file config.log for the"
+ echo "*** exact error that occured. This usually means GTK was incorrectly installed"
+ echo "*** or that you have moved GTK since it was installed. In the latter case, you"
+ echo "*** may want to edit the gtk-config script: $GTK_CONFIG" ])
+ CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS"
+ LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+ fi
+ fi
+ GTK_CFLAGS=""
+ GTK_LIBS=""
+ ifelse([$3], , :, [$3])
+ fi
+ AC_SUBST(GTK_CFLAGS)
+ AC_SUBST(GTK_LIBS)
+ rm -f conf.gtktest
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AC_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Ulrich Drepper
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AC_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Sets HAVE_PTRDIFF_T if the type exists.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T,
+ [AC_CACHE_CHECK([for ptrdiff_t], am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t,
+ [AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <stddef.h>], [ptrdiff_t p],
+ am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t=yes, am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t=no)])
+ if test $am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t = yes; then
+ AC_DEFINE(HAVE_PTRDIFF_T)
+ fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_WITH_REGEX-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown (possibly Franc,ois Pinard)
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_WITH_REGEX
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use:
+dnl The idea is to distribute rx.[hc] and regex.[hc] together,
+dnl for a while. The WITH_REGEX symbol (which should also be
+dnl documented in acconfig.h) is used to decide which of regex.h
+dnl or rx.h should be included in the application. If
+dnl `./configure --with-regex' is given (the default), the
+dnl package will use gawk's regex. If `./configure
+dnl --without-regex', a check is made to see if rx is already
+dnl installed, as with newer Linux'es. If not found, the package
+dnl will use the rx from the distribution. If found, the package
+dnl will use the system's rx which, on Linux at least, will
+dnl result in a smaller executable file.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_WITH_REGEX,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING(which of GNU rx or gawk's regex is wanted)
+AC_ARG_WITH(regex,
+[ --without-regex use GNU rx in lieu of gawk's regex for matching],
+[test "$withval" = yes && am_with_regex=1],
+[am_with_regex=1])
+if test -n "$am_with_regex"; then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(regex)
+ AC_DEFINE(WITH_REGEX)
+ AC_CACHE_CHECK([for GNU regex in libc], am_cv_gnu_regex,
+ AC_TRY_LINK([], [extern int re_max_failures; re_max_failures = 1],
+ am_cv_gnu_regex=yes, am_cv_gnu_regex=no))
+ if test $am_cv_gnu_regex = no; then
+ LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS regex.o"
+ fi
+else
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(rx)
+ AC_CHECK_FUNC(re_rx_search, , [LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS rx.o"])
+fi
+AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_SANITY_CHECK-@*
+dnl
+dnl Author: Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_SANITY_CHECK
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Check for build environment sanity.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_SANITY_CHECK,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether build environment is sane])
+# Just in case
+sleep 1
+echo timestamp > conftestfile
+# Do `set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's
+# arguments. Must try -L first in case configure is actually a
+# symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks
+# (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing
+# directory).
+if (
+ set X `ls -Lt $srcdir/configure conftestfile 2> /dev/null`
+ if test "$@" = "X"; then
+ # -L didn't work.
+ set X `ls -t $srcdir/configure conftestfile`
+ fi
+ test "[$]2" = conftestfile
+ )
+then
+ # Ok.
+ :
+else
+ AC_MSG_ERROR([newly created file is older than distributed files!
+Check your system clock])
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_STRDOD-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_STRTOD
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Checks for a working strtod function.
+
+## Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+## This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+## any later version.
+
+## This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+## but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+## GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+## along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+## Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
+## 02111-1307, USA.
+
+## From Jim Meyering.
+
+## serial 1
+
+## @defmac AC_FUNC_STRTOD
+## @maindex FUNC_STRTOD
+## @ovindex LIBOBJS
+## If the @code{strtod} function is not available, or does not work
+## correctly (like the one on SunOS 5.4), add @samp{strtod.o} to output
+## variable @code{LIBOBJS}.
+## @end defmac
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_STRTOD,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for working strtod, am_cv_func_strtod,
+[AC_TRY_RUN([
+double strtod ();
+int
+main()
+{
+ {
+ /* Some versions of Linux strtod mis-parse strings with leading '+'. */
+ char *string = " +69";
+ char *term;
+ double value;
+ value = strtod (string, &term);
+ if (value != 69 || term != (string + 4))
+ exit (1);
+ }
+
+ {
+ /* Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the
+ terminating character under some conditions. */
+
+## @defmac AC_FUNC_STRTOD
+## @maindex FUNC_STRTOD
+## @ovindex LIBOBJS
+## If the @code{strtod} function is not available, or does not work
+## correctly (like the one on SunOS 5.4), add @samp{strtod.o} to output
+## variable @code{LIBOBJS}.
+## @end defmac
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_STRTOD,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for working strtod, am_cv_func_strtod,
+[AC_TRY_RUN([
+double strtod ();
+int
+main()
+{
+ {
+ /* Some versions of Linux strtod mis-parse strings with leading '+'. */
+ char *string = " +69";
+ char *term;
+ double value;
+ value = strtod (string, &term);
+ if (value != 69 || term != (string + 4))
+ exit (1);
+ }
+
+ {
+ /* Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the
+ terminating character under some conditions. */
+ char *string = "NaN";
+ char *term;
+ strtod (string, &term);
+ if (term != string && *(term - 1) == 0)
+ exit (1);
+ }
+ exit (0);
+}
+], am_cv_func_strtod=yes, am_cv_func_strtod=no, am_cv_func_strtod=no)])
+test $am_cv_func_strtod = no && LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS strtod.o"
+AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl
+am_cv_func_strtod_needs_libm=no
+if test $am_cv_func_strtod = no; then
+ AC_CHECK_FUNCS(pow)
+ if test $ac_cv_func_pow = no; then
+ AC_CHECK_LIB(m, pow, [am_cv_func_strtod_needs_libm=yes],
+ [AC_MSG_WARN(can't find library containing definition of pow)])
+ fi
+fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Checks for a POSIX termios.h.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([POSIX termios], am_cv_sys_posix_termios,
+ [AC_TRY_LINK([#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <termios.h>],
+ [/* SunOS 4.0.3 has termios.h but not the library calls. */
+ tcgetattr(0, 0);],
+ am_cv_sys_posix_termios=yes,
+ am_cv_sys_posix_termios=no)])
+])
+
+dnl----- Macros by Mark Wooding ------------------------------ *@--IGNORE--@*
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_REQUIRE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_REQUIRE(MACRO, ARGS...)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: MACRO = name of a macro which should have been called
+dnl ARGS = arguments to pass
+dnl
+dnl Use: Like `AC_REQUIRE', only it handles arguments.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_REQUIRE,
+[ifdef([AC_PROVIDED_$1], ,
+[AC_DIVERT_PUSH(builtin(eval, AC_DIVERSION_CURRENT - 1))dnl
+indir($@)
+AC_DIVERT_POP()dnl
+])])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS(FUNC, LIBS, [IF-FOUND], [IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: FUNC = a function to try to find
+dnl LIBS = a whitespace-separated list of libraries to search
+dnl IF-FOUND = what to do when the function is found
+dnl IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do when the function isn't found
+dnl
+dnl Use: Searches for a library which defines FUNC. It first tries
+dnl without any libraries; then it tries each library specified
+dnl in LIBS in turn. If it finds a match, it adds the
+dnl appropriate library to `LIBS'.
+dnl
+dnl This is particularly handy under DIREIX: if you link with
+dnl `-lnsl' then you get non-NIS-aware versions of getpwnam and
+dnl so on, which is clearly a Bad Thing.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for library containing $1], [mdw_cv_lib_$1],
+[mdw_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+mdw_cv_lib_$1="no"
+AC_TRY_LINK(,[$1()], [mdw_cv_lib_$1="none required"])
+test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" = "no" && for i in $2; do
+LIBS="-l$i $mdw_save_LIBS"
+AC_TRY_LINK(,[$1()],
+[mdw_cv_lib_$1="-l$i"
+break])
+done
+LIBS="$mdw_save_LIBS"])
+if test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" != "no"; then
+ test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" = "none required" || LIBS="$mdw_cv_lib_$1 $LIBS"
+ $3
+else :
+ $4
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw__PERL_VERSION-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl AC_DEFUN relies on `[', `]' being quotes, so I have to drop down a level.
+
+changequote(<<, >>)
+define(mdw__PERL_VERSION, <<$1 -e 'exit ($] < $2);' >&5 2>&5>>)
+changequote([, ])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_PROG_PERL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_PROG_PERL(VERSION, [IF-FOUND], [IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: VERSION = version number of Perl required
+dnl IF-FOUND = what to do if it's found
+dnl IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do if it isn't
+dnl
+dnl Use: Attempts to find a working version of Perl with a late
+dnl enough version number. It supplies an option `--with-perl'
+dnl to allow the user to provide a Perl interpreter. If one
+dnl isn't provided explicitly, it searches for `perl' and `perl5'
+dnl in the current PATH, asking them whether they have a late
+dnl enough version number. The path of the working Perl is
+dnl put into the `PERL' environment variable; `AC_SUBST' is used
+dnl to substitute its value into Perl scripts. If there is no
+dnl Perl to be found, the value of `PERL' is set to be `none'.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_PROG_PERL,
+[AC_ARG_WITH([perl],
+[ --with-perl=PERL specify path to Perl version $1 or newer],
+[PERL="$withval"],
+if test -z "$PERL"; then
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for Perl version $1 or later], mdw_cv_prog_perl,
+[mdw_cv_prog_perl="none"
+for p in `echo "$PATH:/usr/local/bin" | tr ":" " "`; do
+ case $p in /*) ;; *) p=`pwd`/$p ;; esac
+ if mdw__PERL_VERSION(["$p/perl"], $1); then
+ mdw_cv_prog_perl="$p/perl"
+ break
+ fi
+ if mdw__PERL_VERSION(["$p/perl5"], $1); then
+ mdw_cv_prog_perl="$p/perl5"
+ break
+ fi
+done])
+PERL="$mdw_cv_prog_perl"])
+fi
+
+AC_SUBST(PERL)dnl
+if test "$PERL" = "none"; then :
+ $3
+else :
+ $2
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_CHECK_PERL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_CHECK_PERL(VERSION)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: VERSION = version number of Perl required
+dnl
+dnl Use: Verifies that the Perl interpreter in the `PERL' shell
+dnl variable actually works and is of the right version. If it's
+dnl not, an error is raised and configuration is aborted.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_CHECK_PERL,
+[mdw_REQUIRE([mdw_PROG_PERL], [$1])
+AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether Perl ($PERL) works])
+if test "$PERL" != "none" && mdw__PERL_VERSION("$PERL", $1); then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+else
+ AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+ AC_MSG_ERROR([Perl version $1 or newer not found.
+If you have a recent enough Perl, and I just failed to find it, try using
+the --with-perl=PERL option to give me an explicit pathname.])
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK(LIBRARY)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: LIBRARY = name of a Perl library to check for
+dnl
+dnl Use: Ensures that a Perl script can `use LIBRARY;'. If it can,
+dnl all's well and good; if it can't, `LIBRARY.pm' is added to
+dnl the variable `NEEDED_PERLLIBS' and a line which adds
+dnl `pkgdatadir' to Perl's `@INC' array is placed in the
+dnl variable `INC_PERLLIBS'; `AC_SUBST' is called for both of
+dnl these variables. It's expected that `NEEDED_PERLLIBS' will
+dnl be used in the `Makefile.in' to decide which versions from
+dnl the distribution need installing.
+dnl
+dnl This macro isn't terribly useful in the general case. It
+dnl Also implicitly assumes that `$PERL' is Perl 5 or later.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw__PERLLIB_INIT,
+[AC_SUBST(INC_PERLLIBS)dnl
+AC_SUBST(NEEDED_PERLLIBS)dnl
+])
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK,
+[AC_REQUIRE([mdw__PERLLIB_INIT])
+mdw_REQUIRE([mdw_CHECK_PERL], 5)
+AC_CACHE_CHECK([for Perl library $1], mdw_cv_perllib_$1,
+[if $PERL -e 'use $1;' >&5 2>&5; then
+ mdw_cv_perllib_$1="yes"
+else
+ mdw_cv_perllib_$1="no"
+fi])
+
+if test "$mdw_cv_perllib_$1" = "no"; then
+ NEEDED_PERLLIBS="$NEEDED_PERLLIBS $1.pm"
+
+ # --- Deal with autoconf lossage ---
+ #
+ # It doesn't want to define `prefix' until rather later on, so I have
+ # to bodge it here.
+
+ if test -z "$INC_PERLLIBS"; then
+ mdw_old_prefix="$prefix"
+ test "$prefix" = "NONE" && prefix="$ac_default_prefix";
+ INC_PERLLIBS="BEGIN { push @INC, \"`eval echo $datadir/$PACKAGE`\"; }"
+ prefix="$mdw_old_prefix";
+ fi
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_GCC_FLAGS-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_GCC_FLAGS([FLAGS], [CFLAGS], [C++FLAGS])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: FLAGS = GCC compiler flags to add (default is
+dnl `-pedantic -Wall')
+dnl CFLAGS = GCC C compiler flags to add (default is empty)
+dnl C++FLAGS = GCC C++ compiler flags to add (default is
+dnl `-fhandle-exceptions').
+dnl
+dnl Use: If the C compiler is GCC, add the compiler flags.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_GCC_FLAGS,
+[if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+ CFLAGS="$CFLAGS ifelse([$1], [], [-pedantic -Wall], [$1])"
+ CFLAGS="$CFLAGS ifelse([$2], [], [], [$2])"
+fi
+if test "$GXX" = "yes"; then
+ CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS ifelse([$1], [], [-pedantic -Wall], [$1])"
+ CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS ifelse([$3], [], [-fhandle-exceptions], [$3])"
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_NDEBUG-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_OPT_NDEBUG
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Turns off the `NDEBUG' flag if the user wants to do
+dnl debugging.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_NDEBUG,
+[AC_ARG_ENABLE(debugging,
+[ --enable-debugging spews vast swathes of useless information],
+[if test "$enableval" = "no"; then
+ AC_DEFINE(NDEBUG, 1)
+fi],
+[AC_DEFINE(NDEBUG, 1)])])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_EFENCE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_OPT_EFENCE
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Links with the Electric Fence library.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_EFENCE,
+[AC_ARG_WITH(electric-fence,
+[ --with-electric-fence link programs with Electric Fence],
+[if test "$withval" = "yes"; then
+ AC_CHECK_LIB(efence, malloc)
+fi])])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author: Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis: mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG(PROGRAM)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments: ---
+dnl
+dnl Use: Provides options for mLib debugging. In particular, the
+dnl following are defined:
+dnl
+dnl --enable-tracing turns off the NTRACE variable
+dnl --enable-track turns on malloc tracking
+dnl --enable-blame-PROGRAM tracks malloc contexts in PROGRAM
+dnl
+dnl There must be a separate `blame' option, so that the various
+dnl blame options work properly.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG,
+[mdw_OPT_NDEBUG
+mdw_OPT_EFENCE
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(tracing,
+[ --enable-tracing enable output of tracing information],
+[if test "$enableval" = "no"; then
+ AC_DEFINE(NTRACE, 1)
+fi],
+[AC_DEFINE(NTRACE, 1)])
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(track,
+[ --enable-track enable tracking of malloc and free],
+[AC_DEFINE(TRACK_ENABLE, 1)])
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(blame-$1,
+[ --enable-blame-$1
+ track malloc contexts while in $1],
+[AC_DEFINE(TRACK_BLAME, 1)])])
+
+dnl----- That's all, folks --------------------------------- *@--GLOB-END--@*
--- /dev/null
+.TH ANSI2KNR 1 "31 December 1990"
+.SH NAME
+ansi2knr \- convert ANSI C to Kernighan & Ritchie C
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.I ansi2knr
+input_file output_file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If no output_file is supplied, output goes to stdout.
+.br
+There are no error messages.
+.sp
+.I ansi2knr
+recognizes functions by seeing a non-keyword identifier at the left margin, followed by a left parenthesis, with a right parenthesis as the last character on the line. It will recognize a multi-line header if the last character on each line but the last is a left parenthesis or comma. These algorithms ignore whitespace and comments, except that the function name must be the first thing on the line.
+.sp
+The following constructs will confuse it:
+.br
+ - Any other construct that starts at the left margin and follows the above syntax (such as a macro or function call).
+.br
+ - Macros that tinker with the syntax of the function header.
--- /dev/null
+/* Copyright (C) 1989, 1991, 1993, 1994 Aladdin Enterprises. All rights reserved. */
+
+/* ansi2knr.c */
+/* Convert ANSI function declarations to K&R syntax */
+
+/*
+ansi2knr is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts responsibility
+to anyone for the consequences of using it or for whether it serves any
+particular purpose or works at all, unless he says so in writing. Refer
+to the GNU General Public License for full details.
+
+Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+ansi2knr, but only under the conditions described in the GNU
+General Public License. A copy of this license is supposed to have been
+given to you along with ansi2knr so you can know your rights and
+responsibilities. It should be in a file named COPYLEFT. Among other
+things, the copyright notice and this notice must be preserved on all
+copies.
+*/
+
+/*
+ * Usage:
+ ansi2knr [--varargs] input_file [output_file]
+ * If no output_file is supplied, output goes to stdout.
+ * There are no error messages.
+ *
+ * ansi2knr recognizes function definitions by seeing a non-keyword
+ * identifier at the left margin, followed by a left parenthesis,
+ * with a right parenthesis as the last character on the line.
+ * It will recognize a multi-line header provided that the last character
+ * of the last line of the header is a right parenthesis,
+ * and no intervening line ends with a left brace or a semicolon.
+ * These algorithms ignore whitespace and comments, except that
+ * the function name must be the first thing on the line.
+ * The following constructs will confuse it:
+ * - Any other construct that starts at the left margin and
+ * follows the above syntax (such as a macro or function call).
+ * - Macros that tinker with the syntax of the function header.
+ *
+ * If the --varargs switch is supplied, ansi2knr will attempt to
+ * convert a ... argument to va_alist and va_dcl. If this switch is not
+ * supplied, ansi2knr will simply drop any such arguments.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * The original and principal author of ansi2knr is L. Peter Deutsch
+ * <ghost@aladdin.com>. Other authors are noted in the change history
+ * that follows (in reverse chronological order):
+ lpd 94-10-10 removed CONFIG_BROKETS conditional
+ lpd 94-07-16 added some conditionals to help GNU `configure',
+ suggested by Francois Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>;
+ properly erase prototype args in function parameters,
+ contributed by Jim Avera <jima@netcom.com>;
+ correct error in writeblanks (it shouldn't erase EOLs)
+ lpd 89-xx-xx original version
+ */
+
+/* Most of the conditionals here are to make ansi2knr work with */
+/* the GNU configure machinery. */
+
+#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
+# include <config.h>
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
+
+/*
+ For properly autoconfiguring ansi2knr, use AC_CONFIG_HEADER(config.h).
+ This will define HAVE_CONFIG_H and so, activate the following lines.
+ */
+
+# if STDC_HEADERS || HAVE_STRING_H
+# include <string.h>
+# else
+# include <strings.h>
+# endif
+
+#else /* not HAVE_CONFIG_H */
+
+/*
+ Without AC_CONFIG_HEADER, merely use <string.h> as in the original
+ Ghostscript distribution. This loses on older BSD systems.
+ */
+
+# include <string.h>
+
+#endif /* not HAVE_CONFIG_H */
+
+#ifdef STDC_HEADERS
+# include <stdlib.h>
+#else
+/*
+ malloc and free should be declared in stdlib.h,
+ but if you've got a K&R compiler, they probably aren't.
+ */
+char *malloc();
+void free();
+#endif
+
+/* Scanning macros */
+#define isidchar(ch) (isalnum(ch) || (ch) == '_')
+#define isidfirstchar(ch) (isalpha(ch) || (ch) == '_')
+
+/* Forward references */
+char *skipspace();
+void writeblanks();
+int test1();
+int convert1();
+
+/* The main program */
+int
+main(argc, argv)
+ int argc;
+ char *argv[];
+{ FILE *in, *out;
+#define bufsize 5000 /* arbitrary size */
+ char *buf;
+ char *line;
+ int convert_varargs = 0;
+ if ( argc > 1 && argv[1][0] == '-' )
+ { if ( !strcmp(argv[1], "--varargs") )
+ { convert_varargs = 1;
+ argc--;
+ argv++;
+ }
+ else
+ { fprintf(stderr, "Unrecognized switch: %s\n", argv[1]);
+ exit(1);
+ }
+ }
+ switch ( argc )
+ {
+ default:
+ printf("Usage: ansi2knr [--varargs] input_file [output_file]\n");
+ exit(0);
+ case 2:
+ out = stdout;
+ break;
+ case 3:
+ out = fopen(argv[2], "w");
+ if ( out == NULL )
+ { fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open output file %s\n", argv[2]);
+ exit(1);
+ }
+ }
+ in = fopen(argv[1], "r");
+ if ( in == NULL )
+ { fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open input file %s\n", argv[1]);
+ exit(1);
+ }
+ fprintf(out, "#line 1 \"%s\"\n", argv[1]);
+ buf = malloc(bufsize);
+ line = buf;
+ while ( fgets(line, (unsigned)(buf + bufsize - line), in) != NULL )
+ { switch ( test1(buf) )
+ {
+ case 2: /* a function header */
+ convert1(buf, out, 1, convert_varargs);
+ break;
+ case 1: /* a function */
+ convert1(buf, out, 0, convert_varargs);
+ break;
+ case -1: /* maybe the start of a function */
+ line = buf + strlen(buf);
+ if ( line != buf + (bufsize - 1) ) /* overflow check */
+ continue;
+ /* falls through */
+ default: /* not a function */
+ fputs(buf, out);
+ break;
+ }
+ line = buf;
+ }
+ if ( line != buf ) fputs(buf, out);
+ free(buf);
+ fclose(out);
+ fclose(in);
+ return 0;
+}
+
+/* Skip over space and comments, in either direction. */
+char *
+skipspace(p, dir)
+ register char *p;
+ register int dir; /* 1 for forward, -1 for backward */
+{ for ( ; ; )
+ { while ( isspace(*p) ) p += dir;
+ if ( !(*p == '/' && p[dir] == '*') ) break;
+ p += dir; p += dir;
+ while ( !(*p == '*' && p[dir] == '/') )
+ { if ( *p == 0 ) return p; /* multi-line comment?? */
+ p += dir;
+ }
+ p += dir; p += dir;
+ }
+ return p;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Write blanks over part of a string.
+ * Don't overwrite end-of-line characters.
+ */
+void
+writeblanks(start, end)
+ char *start;
+ char *end;
+{ char *p;
+ for ( p = start; p < end; p++ )
+ if ( *p != '\r' && *p != '\n' ) *p = ' ';
+}
+
+/*
+ * Test whether the string in buf is a function definition.
+ * The string may contain and/or end with a newline.
+ * Return as follows:
+ * 0 - definitely not a function definition;
+ * 1 - definitely a function definition;
+ * 2 - definitely a function prototype (NOT USED);
+ * -1 - may be the beginning of a function definition,
+ * append another line and look again.
+ * The reason we don't attempt to convert function prototypes is that
+ * Ghostscript's declaration-generating macros look too much like
+ * prototypes, and confuse the algorithms.
+ */
+int
+test1(buf)
+ char *buf;
+{ register char *p = buf;
+ char *bend;
+ char *endfn;
+ int contin;
+ if ( !isidfirstchar(*p) )
+ return 0; /* no name at left margin */
+ bend = skipspace(buf + strlen(buf) - 1, -1);
+ switch ( *bend )
+ {
+ case ';': contin = 0 /*2*/; break;
+ case ')': contin = 1; break;
+ case '{': return 0; /* not a function */
+ default: contin = -1;
+ }
+ while ( isidchar(*p) ) p++;
+ endfn = p;
+ p = skipspace(p, 1);
+ if ( *p++ != '(' )
+ return 0; /* not a function */
+ p = skipspace(p, 1);
+ if ( *p == ')' )
+ return 0; /* no parameters */
+ /* Check that the apparent function name isn't a keyword. */
+ /* We only need to check for keywords that could be followed */
+ /* by a left parenthesis (which, unfortunately, is most of them). */
+ { static char *words[] =
+ { "asm", "auto", "case", "char", "const", "double",
+ "extern", "float", "for", "if", "int", "long",
+ "register", "return", "short", "signed", "sizeof",
+ "static", "switch", "typedef", "unsigned",
+ "void", "volatile", "while", 0
+ };
+ char **key = words;
+ char *kp;
+ int len = endfn - buf;
+ while ( (kp = *key) != 0 )
+ { if ( strlen(kp) == len && !strncmp(kp, buf, len) )
+ return 0; /* name is a keyword */
+ key++;
+ }
+ }
+ return contin;
+}
+
+/* Convert a recognized function definition or header to K&R syntax. */
+int
+convert1(buf, out, header, convert_varargs)
+ char *buf;
+ FILE *out;
+ int header; /* Boolean */
+ int convert_varargs; /* Boolean */
+{ char *endfn;
+ register char *p;
+ char **breaks;
+ unsigned num_breaks = 2; /* for testing */
+ char **btop;
+ char **bp;
+ char **ap;
+ char *vararg = 0;
+ /* Pre-ANSI implementations don't agree on whether strchr */
+ /* is called strchr or index, so we open-code it here. */
+ for ( endfn = buf; *(endfn++) != '('; ) ;
+top: p = endfn;
+ breaks = (char **)malloc(sizeof(char *) * num_breaks * 2);
+ if ( breaks == 0 )
+ { /* Couldn't allocate break table, give up */
+ fprintf(stderr, "Unable to allocate break table!\n");
+ fputs(buf, out);
+ return -1;
+ }
+ btop = breaks + num_breaks * 2 - 2;
+ bp = breaks;
+ /* Parse the argument list */
+ do
+ { int level = 0;
+ char *lp = NULL;
+ char *rp;
+ char *end = NULL;
+ if ( bp >= btop )
+ { /* Filled up break table. */
+ /* Allocate a bigger one and start over. */
+ free((char *)breaks);
+ num_breaks <<= 1;
+ goto top;
+ }
+ *bp++ = p;
+ /* Find the end of the argument */
+ for ( ; end == NULL; p++ )
+ { switch(*p)
+ {
+ case ',':
+ if ( !level ) end = p;
+ break;
+ case '(':
+ if ( !level ) lp = p;
+ level++;
+ break;
+ case ')':
+ if ( --level < 0 ) end = p;
+ else rp = p;
+ break;
+ case '/':
+ p = skipspace(p, 1) - 1;
+ break;
+ default:
+ ;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Erase any embedded prototype parameters. */
+ if ( lp )
+ writeblanks(lp + 1, rp);
+ p--; /* back up over terminator */
+ /* Find the name being declared. */
+ /* This is complicated because of procedure and */
+ /* array modifiers. */
+ for ( ; ; )
+ { p = skipspace(p - 1, -1);
+ switch ( *p )
+ {
+ case ']': /* skip array dimension(s) */
+ case ')': /* skip procedure args OR name */
+ { int level = 1;
+ while ( level )
+ switch ( *--p )
+ {
+ case ']': case ')': level++; break;
+ case '[': case '(': level--; break;
+ case '/': p = skipspace(p, -1) + 1; break;
+ default: ;
+ }
+ }
+ if ( *p == '(' && *skipspace(p + 1, 1) == '*' )
+ { /* We found the name being declared */
+ while ( !isidfirstchar(*p) )
+ p = skipspace(p, 1) + 1;
+ goto found;
+ }
+ break;
+ default: goto found;
+ }
+ }
+found: if ( *p == '.' && p[-1] == '.' && p[-2] == '.' )
+ { if ( convert_varargs )
+ { *bp++ = "va_alist";
+ vararg = p-2;
+ }
+ else
+ { p++;
+ if ( bp == breaks + 1 ) /* sole argument */
+ writeblanks(breaks[0], p);
+ else
+ writeblanks(bp[-1] - 1, p);
+ bp--;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ { while ( isidchar(*p) ) p--;
+ *bp++ = p+1;
+ }
+ p = end;
+ }
+ while ( *p++ == ',' );
+ *bp = p;
+ /* Make a special check for 'void' arglist */
+ if ( bp == breaks+2 )
+ { p = skipspace(breaks[0], 1);
+ if ( !strncmp(p, "void", 4) )
+ { p = skipspace(p+4, 1);
+ if ( p == breaks[2] - 1 )
+ { bp = breaks; /* yup, pretend arglist is empty */
+ writeblanks(breaks[0], p + 1);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Put out the function name and left parenthesis. */
+ p = buf;
+ while ( p != endfn ) putc(*p, out), p++;
+ /* Put out the declaration. */
+ if ( header )
+ { fputs(");", out);
+ for ( p = breaks[0]; *p; p++ )
+ if ( *p == '\r' || *p == '\n' )
+ putc(*p, out);
+ }
+ else
+ { for ( ap = breaks+1; ap < bp; ap += 2 )
+ { p = *ap;
+ while ( isidchar(*p) )
+ putc(*p, out), p++;
+ if ( ap < bp - 1 )
+ fputs(", ", out);
+ }
+ fputs(") ", out);
+ /* Put out the argument declarations */
+ for ( ap = breaks+2; ap <= bp; ap += 2 )
+ (*ap)[-1] = ';';
+ if ( vararg != 0 )
+ { *vararg = 0;
+ fputs(breaks[0], out); /* any prior args */
+ fputs("va_dcl", out); /* the final arg */
+ fputs(bp[0], out);
+ }
+ else
+ fputs(breaks[0], out);
+ }
+ free((char *)breaks);
+ return 0;
+}
--- /dev/null
+\input texinfo.tex @c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c
+@c $Id: common.texi,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+@c
+@c Documentation for `common'
+@c
+@c (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+@c
+
+@c ----- Licensing notice ---------------------------------------------------
+@c
+@c This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+@c
+@c `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+@c it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+@c the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+@c (at your option) any later version.
+@c
+@c `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+@c but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+@c MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+@c GNU General Public License for more details.
+@c
+@c You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+@c along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+@c Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+@c ----- Standard boilerplate header ----------------------------------------
+
+@c --- Formatting header ---
+
+@c %**start of header
+@setfilename common.info
+@settitle The Common Files Distribution
+@paragraphindent 0
+@iftex
+@input texinice
+@afourpaper
+@end iftex
+@include version.texi
+@c %**end of header
+
+@c --- Info directory entry ---
+
+@direntry
+* Common: (common). The Common Files Distribution.
+@end direntry
+
+@c ----- Introductory stuff and copyright pages -----------------------------
+@c
+@c Yes indeed, by the way: I'm willing to allow a translation approved
+@c by the FSF, not me. I can't be bothered to vet translations.
+
+@c --- Info version ---
+
+@ifinfo
+
+This file documents version @value{VERSION} of the Common Files Distribution.
+
+Copyright (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+@ignore
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries a copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+
+@end ignore
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
+sections entitled `Copying' and `GNU General Public License' are
+included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation
+approved by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@end ifinfo
+
+@c --- Printed version ---
+
+@titlepage
+@title The Common Files Distribution
+@subtitle version @value{VERSION}
+@author Mark Wooding
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1 filll
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
+sections entitled `Copying' and `GNU General Public License' are
+included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation
+approved by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@end titlepage
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@ifinfo
+@node Top, Copying, (dir), (dir)
+@unnumbered The Common Files Distribution
+
+
+The Common Files Distribution provides a convenient way to manage files
+shared between a number of developments.
+
+This manual documents version @value{VERSION} of the Common Files
+Distribution.
+
+@end ifinfo
+
+@menu
+* Copying::
+* Introduction::
+* The file repository::
+* Text libraries::
+
+ --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
+
+The file repository
+
+* The mklinks command::
+* The findlinks command::
+
+Text libraries
+
+* Anatomy:: Structure of a text library.
+* The txtlib program::
+@end menu
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Copying, Introduction, Top, Top
+@unnumbered The GNU General Public License
+
+@include gpl.texi
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Introduction, The file repository, Copying, Top
+@unnumbered Introduction
+
+
+When you have a number of development trees, managing files which are common
+to all of them starts to become a real pain. When a new version of some file
+comes out, checking out all your source directories, replacing the old
+version with the new one, and committing all the changes back gets to be
+very tiresome rather quickly.
+
+The Common File Distribution attempts to be a solution to some of the
+problems caused sharing files between source trees. It provides a single
+repository for shared files, and lets you create links to the shared copies
+from your source trees. It also provides a simple method for constructing
+text files from small bits of `text libraries'.
+
+The whole lot is held together by a collection of small shell scripts. They
+can easily be modified to suit the requirements of an individual site, or
+used as the basis of other similar scripts.
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node The file repository, Text libraries, Introduction, Top
+@chapter The file repository
+
+
+When the Common File Distribution is installed, it creates a repository where
+shared files can be placed, and it places a few standard GNU files there. By
+default, the repository is @file{@var{prefix}/share/common}, although this
+can be set using the @code{--datadir} option to the configuration script.
+
+You can place your own files in the repository if you like. If you do,
+they'll be treated in exactly the same way as ones in the distribution.
+
+The command @code{mklinks} reads a list of filenames and creates symbolic
+links to the corresponding names in the repository. This ensures that when a
+file in the repository gets updated, any source trees automatically use the
+new version. Obviously, when you build a source distribution, you must
+ensure that links are followed, rather than saved as links; the @code{h}
+option to @code{tar} does this (this is the default in Automake; @pxref{Top,
+, Overview, automake, GNU Automake}).
+
+The command @code{findlinks} scans the current directory (and its
+subdirectories) for files whose names match those in the repository.
+
+@menu
+* The mklinks command::
+* The findlinks command::
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node The mklinks command, The findlinks command, The file repository, The file repository
+@section The @code{mklinks} command
+
+Links into the file repository are made with the @code{mklinks} command:
+
+@example
+mklinks [@var{file}]...
+@end example
+
+If you don't specify any @code{file}s, it reads @file{.links} from the
+current directory; you can pass @samp{-} to read standard input. The program
+expects the files to contain a list of filenames; for each name read, it
+creates a symbolic link to the appropriate file in the repository.
+
+You can create a list of files which probably need linking using the
+@code{findlinks} command. @xref{The findlinks command}.
+
+
+
+@node The findlinks command, , The mklinks command, The file repository
+@section The @code{findlinks} command
+
+The @code{findlinks} searches the current directory and any subdirectories
+and writes to standard output a list of files whose names match files in the
+file repository. It takes no arguments, although typically output will be
+redirected to the file @file{.links}, which the @code{mklinks} command reads
+by default:
+
+@example
+findlinks >.links
+@end example
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Text libraries, , The file repository, Top
+@chapter Text libraries
+
+
+Just being able to share files isn't always good enough: it's sometimes
+useful to able to share small parts of files. The Common Files Distribution
+comes with a simple system for extracting requested parts from a @dfn{text
+library}.
+
+
+@menu
+* Anatomy:: Structure of a text library.
+* The txtlib program::
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node Anatomy, The txtlib program, Text libraries, Text libraries
+@section Anatomy of a library file
+
+Text libraries contain a @dfn{header} followed by a number of @dfn{chunks}.
+The start of a chunk is marked by a line containing a string of the form
+@samp{*@@-@var{name}-@@*}; the chunk continues until the start of the next
+chunk, or the end of the file. The header is simply the text preceding the
+first chunk.
+
+Here's a simple example of a text library.
+
+@example
+% -*-tex-*-
+%
+% Collection of useful macros
+%
+
+% *@@-todo-@@*
+
+\newcommand\todo[1]@{%
+ \par%
+ \dimen@@\linewidth%
+ \advance\dimen@@-\tw@@\fboxsep%
+ \advance\dimen@@-\tw@@\fboxrule%
+ \fbox@{\expandafter\parbox\expandafter@{\the\dimen@@@}@{%
+ \begin@{note@}[To do:]%
+ #1%
+ \end@{note@}%
+ @}@}%
+ \par%
+@}
+
+% *@@-indexing-@@*
+
+\newindex@{default@}@{idx@}@{ind@}@{Index@}
+\atdef^@{\index@}
+\atdef_@{\index*@}
+@end example
+
+The file contains a short header containing a line to tell Emacs what mode
+to use when editing it and a brief description of the file. It contains two
+chunks, named @code{todo} and @code{indexing}
+
+
+@node The txtlib program, , Anatomy, Text libraries
+@section The @code{txtlib} program
+
+The @code{txtlib} program can be used to perform some simple operations on
+text libraries:
+
+@example
+txtlib [-x] [-o @var{file}] @var{library}...
+txtlib -l @var{library}...
+@end example
+
+By default, or if the @code{-x} option is given, @code{txtlib} extracts
+chunks from libraries. It reads a list of chunk names from standard input,
+one per line. It then examines each @var{library} named on the command line,
+and extracts the requested chunks, writing them to standard output, or to a
+named file. Note that the chunks are extracted in the order they appear in
+the libraries, not the order in which their chunk names were listed.
+
+If the @code{-l} option is given, @code{txtlib} scans each @var{library} in
+turn, writing the names of all the chunks it finds to standard output.
+
+
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+@contents
+@bye
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+# Attempt to guess a canonical system name.
+# Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+# General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+#
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# Written by Per Bothner <bothner@cygnus.com>.
+# The master version of this file is at the FSF in /home/gd/gnu/lib.
+#
+# This script attempts to guess a canonical system name similar to
+# config.sub. If it succeeds, it prints the system name on stdout, and
+# exits with 0. Otherwise, it exits with 1.
+#
+# The plan is that this can be called by configure scripts if you
+# don't specify an explicit system type (host/target name).
+#
+# Only a few systems have been added to this list; please add others
+# (but try to keep the structure clean).
+#
+
+# This is needed to find uname on a Pyramid OSx when run in the BSD universe.
+# (ghazi@noc.rutgers.edu 8/24/94.)
+if (test -f /.attbin/uname) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
+ PATH=$PATH:/.attbin ; export PATH
+fi
+
+UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -m) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_MACHINE=unknown
+UNAME_RELEASE=`(uname -r) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_RELEASE=unknown
+UNAME_SYSTEM=`(uname -s) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_SYSTEM=unknown
+UNAME_VERSION=`(uname -v) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_VERSION=unknown
+
+trap 'rm -f dummy.c dummy.o dummy; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# Note: order is significant - the case branches are not exclusive.
+
+case "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" in
+ alpha:OSF1:*:*)
+ # A Vn.n version is a released version.
+ # A Tn.n version is a released field test version.
+ # A Xn.n version is an unreleased experimental baselevel.
+ # 1.2 uses "1.2" for uname -r.
+ echo alpha-dec-osf`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/^[VTX]//'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ 21064:Windows_NT:50:3)
+ echo alpha-dec-winnt3.5
+ exit 0 ;;
+ Amiga*:UNIX_System_V:4.0:*)
+ echo m68k-cbm-sysv4
+ exit 0;;
+ amiga:NetBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-cbm-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ amiga:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ arc64:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo mips64el-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ arc:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ hkmips:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ pmax:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ sgi:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ wgrisc:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ arm:RISC*:1.[012]*:*|arm:riscix:1.[012]*:*)
+ echo arm-acorn-riscix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0;;
+ SR2?01:HI-UX/MPP:*:*)
+ echo hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxmpp
+ exit 0;;
+ Pyramid*:OSx*:*:*|MIS*:OSx*:*:*)
+ # akee@wpdis03.wpafb.af.mil (Earle F. Ake) contributed MIS and NILE.
+ if test "`(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null`" = att ; then
+ echo pyramid-pyramid-sysv3
+ else
+ echo pyramid-pyramid-bsd
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ NILE:*:*:dcosx)
+ echo pyramid-pyramid-svr4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ sun4*:SunOS:5.*:* | tadpole*:SunOS:5.*:*)
+ echo sparc-sun-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i86pc:SunOS:5.*:*)
+ echo i386-pc-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ sun4*:SunOS:6*:*)
+ # According to config.sub, this is the proper way to canonicalize
+ # SunOS6. Hard to guess exactly what SunOS6 will be like, but
+ # it's likely to be more like Solaris than SunOS4.
+ echo sparc-sun-solaris3`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ sun4*:SunOS:*:*)
+ case "`/usr/bin/arch -k`" in
+ Series*|S4*)
+ UNAME_RELEASE=`uname -v`
+ ;;
+ esac
+ # Japanese Language versions have a version number like `4.1.3-JL'.
+ echo sparc-sun-sunos`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ sun3*:SunOS:*:*)
+ echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ aushp:SunOS:*:*)
+ echo sparc-auspex-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ atari*:NetBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-atari-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ atari*:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ sun3*:NetBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-sun-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ sun3*:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mac68k:NetBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-apple-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mac68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mvme68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mvme88k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo m88k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ powerpc:machten:*:*)
+ echo powerpc-apple-machten${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ RISC*:Mach:*:*)
+ echo mips-dec-mach_bsd4.3
+ exit 0 ;;
+ RISC*:ULTRIX:*:*)
+ echo mips-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ VAX*:ULTRIX*:*:*)
+ echo vax-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ 2020:CLIX:*:*)
+ echo clipper-intergraph-clix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mips:*:*:UMIPS | mips:*:*:RISCos)
+ sed 's/^ //' << EOF >dummy.c
+ int main (argc, argv) int argc; char **argv; {
+ #if defined (host_mips) && defined (MIPSEB)
+ #if defined (SYSTYPE_SYSV)
+ printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssysv\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+ #endif
+ #if defined (SYSTYPE_SVR4)
+ printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssvr4\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+ #endif
+ #if defined (SYSTYPE_BSD43) || defined(SYSTYPE_BSD)
+ printf ("mips-mips-riscos%sbsd\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+ #endif
+ #endif
+ exit (-1);
+ }
+EOF
+ ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy \
+ && ./dummy `echo "${UNAME_RELEASE}" | sed -n 's/\([0-9]*\).*/\1/p'` \
+ && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+ rm -f dummy.c dummy
+ echo mips-mips-riscos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ Night_Hawk:Power_UNIX:*:*)
+ echo powerpc-harris-powerunix
+ exit 0 ;;
+ m88k:CX/UX:7*:*)
+ echo m88k-harris-cxux7
+ exit 0 ;;
+ m88k:*:4*:R4*)
+ echo m88k-motorola-sysv4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ m88k:*:3*:R3*)
+ echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
+ exit 0 ;;
+ AViiON:dgux:*:*)
+ # DG/UX returns AViiON for all architectures
+ UNAME_PROCESSOR=`/usr/bin/uname -p`
+ if [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88100 -o $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88110 ] ; then
+ if [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = m88kdguxelfx \
+ -o ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = x ] ; then
+ echo m88k-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ else
+ echo m88k-dg-dguxbcs${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ fi
+ else echo i586-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ M88*:DolphinOS:*:*) # DolphinOS (SVR3)
+ echo m88k-dolphin-sysv3
+ exit 0 ;;
+ M88*:*:R3*:*)
+ # Delta 88k system running SVR3
+ echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
+ exit 0 ;;
+ XD88*:*:*:*) # Tektronix XD88 system running UTekV (SVR3)
+ echo m88k-tektronix-sysv3
+ exit 0 ;;
+ Tek43[0-9][0-9]:UTek:*:*) # Tektronix 4300 system running UTek (BSD)
+ echo m68k-tektronix-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:IRIX*:*:*)
+ echo mips-sgi-irix`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/g'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ ????????:AIX?:[12].1:2) # AIX 2.2.1 or AIX 2.1.1 is RT/PC AIX.
+ echo romp-ibm-aix # uname -m gives an 8 hex-code CPU id
+ exit 0 ;; # Note that: echo "'`uname -s`'" gives 'AIX '
+ i?86:AIX:*:*)
+ echo i386-ibm-aix
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:AIX:2:3)
+ if grep bos325 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+ sed 's/^ //' << EOF >dummy.c
+ #include <sys/systemcfg.h>
+
+ main()
+ {
+ if (!__power_pc())
+ exit(1);
+ puts("powerpc-ibm-aix3.2.5");
+ exit(0);
+ }
+EOF
+ ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+ rm -f dummy.c dummy
+ echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.5
+ elif grep bos324 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+ echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.4
+ else
+ echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:AIX:*:4)
+ if /usr/sbin/lsattr -EHl proc0 | grep POWER >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+ IBM_ARCH=rs6000
+ else
+ IBM_ARCH=powerpc
+ fi
+ if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then
+ IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel`
+ else
+ IBM_REV=4.${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ fi
+ echo ${IBM_ARCH}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:AIX:*:*)
+ echo rs6000-ibm-aix
+ exit 0 ;;
+ ibmrt:4.4BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*)
+ echo romp-ibm-bsd4.4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ ibmrt:*BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*) # covers RT/PC NetBSD and
+ echo romp-ibm-bsd${UNAME_RELEASE} # 4.3 with uname added to
+ exit 0 ;; # report: romp-ibm BSD 4.3
+ *:BOSX:*:*)
+ echo rs6000-bull-bosx
+ exit 0 ;;
+ DPX/2?00:B.O.S.:*:*)
+ echo m68k-bull-sysv3
+ exit 0 ;;
+ 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:1.*:*)
+ echo m68k-hp-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ hp300:4.4BSD:*:* | 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:2.*:*)
+ echo m68k-hp-bsd4.4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ 9000/[3478]??:HP-UX:*:*)
+ case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in
+ 9000/31? ) HP_ARCH=m68000 ;;
+ 9000/[34]?? ) HP_ARCH=m68k ;;
+ 9000/7?? | 9000/8?[1679] ) HP_ARCH=hppa1.1 ;;
+ 9000/8?? ) HP_ARCH=hppa1.0 ;;
+ esac
+ HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'`
+ echo ${HP_ARCH}-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ 3050*:HI-UX:*:*)
+ sed 's/^ //' << EOF >dummy.c
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ int
+ main ()
+ {
+ long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION);
+ /* The order matters, because CPU_IS_HP_MC68K erroneously returns
+ true for CPU_PA_RISC1_0. CPU_IS_PA_RISC returns correct
+ results, however. */
+ if (CPU_IS_PA_RISC (cpu))
+ {
+ switch (cpu)
+ {
+ case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+ case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+ case CPU_PA_RISC2_0: puts ("hppa2.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+ default: puts ("hppa-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (CPU_IS_HP_MC68K (cpu))
+ puts ("m68k-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
+ else puts ("unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
+ exit (0);
+ }
+EOF
+ ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+ rm -f dummy.c dummy
+ echo unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2
+ exit 0 ;;
+ 9000/7??:4.3bsd:*:* | 9000/8?[79]:4.3bsd:*:* )
+ echo hppa1.1-hp-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ 9000/8??:4.3bsd:*:*)
+ echo hppa1.0-hp-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ hp7??:OSF1:*:* | hp8?[79]:OSF1:*:* )
+ echo hppa1.1-hp-osf
+ exit 0 ;;
+ hp8??:OSF1:*:*)
+ echo hppa1.0-hp-osf
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i?86:OSF1:*:*)
+ if [ -x /usr/sbin/sysversion ] ; then
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1mk
+ else
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ parisc*:Lites*:*:*)
+ echo hppa1.1-hp-lites
+ exit 0 ;;
+ C1*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C1*:*)
+ echo c1-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ C2*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C2*:*)
+ if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
+ then echo c32-convex-bsd
+ else echo c2-convex-bsd
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ C34*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C34*:*)
+ echo c34-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ C38*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C38*:*)
+ echo c38-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ C4*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C4*:*)
+ echo c4-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ CRAY*X-MP:*:*:*)
+ echo xmp-cray-unicos
+ exit 0 ;;
+ CRAY*Y-MP:*:*:*)
+ echo ymp-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ CRAY*[A-Z]90:*:*:*)
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} \
+ | sed -e 's/CRAY.*\([A-Z]90\)/\1/' \
+ -e y/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/
+ exit 0 ;;
+ CRAY*TS:*:*:*)
+ echo t90-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ CRAY-2:*:*:*)
+ echo cray2-cray-unicos
+ exit 0 ;;
+ F300:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
+ FUJITSU_SYS=`uname -p | tr [A-Z] [a-z] | sed -e 's/\///'`
+ FUJITSU_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/ /_/'`
+ echo "f300-fujitsu-${FUJITSU_SYS}${FUJITSU_REL}"
+ exit 0 ;;
+ F301:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
+ echo f301-fujitsu-uxpv`echo $UNAME_RELEASE | sed 's/ .*//'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ hp3[0-9][05]:NetBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-hp-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ hp300:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i?86:BSD/386:*:* | *:BSD/OS:*:*)
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:FreeBSD:*:*)
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:NetBSD:*:*)
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-netbsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:OpenBSD:*:*)
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-openbsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i*:CYGWIN*:*)
+ echo i386-pc-cygwin32
+ exit 0 ;;
+ p*:CYGWIN*:*)
+ echo powerpcle-unknown-cygwin32
+ exit 0 ;;
+ prep*:SunOS:5.*:*)
+ echo powerpcle-unknown-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:GNU:*:*)
+ echo `echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}|sed -e 's,[-/].*$,,'`-unknown-gnu`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's,/.*$,,'`
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:Linux:*:*)
+ # The BFD linker knows what the default object file format is, so
+ # first see if it will tell us.
+ ld_help_string=`ld --help 2>&1`
+ if echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: elf_i.86"; then
+ echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnu" ; exit 0
+ elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: i.86linux"; then
+ echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuaout" ; exit 0
+ elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: i.86coff"; then
+ echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnucoff" ; exit 0
+ elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: m68kelf"; then
+ echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu" ; exit 0
+ elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: m68klinux"; then
+ echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnuaout" ; exit 0
+ elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: elf32ppc"; then
+ echo "powerpc-unknown-linux-gnu" ; exit 0
+ elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "alpha" ; then
+ echo alpha-unknown-linux-gnu ; exit 0
+ elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "sparc" ; then
+ echo sparc-unknown-linux-gnu ; exit 0
+ elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "mips" ; then
+ cat >dummy.c <<EOF
+main(argc, argv)
+int argc;
+char *argv[];
+{
+#ifdef __MIPSEB__
+ printf ("%s-unknown-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+#ifdef __MIPSEL__
+ printf ("%sel-unknown-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+ return 0;
+}
+EOF
+ ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy 2>/dev/null && ./dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+ rm -f dummy.c dummy
+ else
+ # Either a pre-BFD a.out linker (linux-gnuoldld) or one that does not give us
+ # useful --help. Gcc wants to distinguish between linux-gnuoldld and linux-gnuaout.
+ test ! -d /usr/lib/ldscripts/. \
+ && echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuoldld" && exit 0
+ # Determine whether the default compiler is a.out or elf
+ cat >dummy.c <<EOF
+main(argc, argv)
+int argc;
+char *argv[];
+{
+#ifdef __ELF__
+ printf ("%s-pc-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#else
+ printf ("%s-pc-linux-gnuaout\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+ return 0;
+}
+EOF
+ ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy 2>/dev/null && ./dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+ rm -f dummy.c dummy
+ fi ;;
+# ptx 4.0 does uname -s correctly, with DYNIX/ptx in there. earlier versions
+# are messed up and put the nodename in both sysname and nodename.
+ i?86:DYNIX/ptx:4*:*)
+ echo i386-sequent-sysv4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i?86:*:4.*:* | i?86:SYSTEM_V:4.*:*)
+ if grep Novell /usr/include/link.h >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-univel-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ else
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i?86:*:3.2:*)
+ if test -f /usr/options/cb.name; then
+ UNAME_REL=`sed -n 's/.*Version //p' </usr/options/cb.name`
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-isc$UNAME_REL
+ elif /bin/uname -X 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
+ UNAME_REL=`(/bin/uname -X|egrep Release|sed -e 's/.*= //')`
+ (/bin/uname -X|egrep i80486 >/dev/null) && UNAME_MACHINE=i486
+ (/bin/uname -X|egrep '^Machine.*Pentium' >/dev/null) \
+ && UNAME_MACHINE=i586
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sco$UNAME_REL
+ else
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv32
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ Intel:Mach:3*:*)
+ echo i386-pc-mach3
+ exit 0 ;;
+ paragon:*:*:*)
+ echo i860-intel-osf1
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i860:*:4.*:*) # i860-SVR4
+ if grep Stardent /usr/include/sys/uadmin.h >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
+ echo i860-stardent-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Stardent Vistra i860-SVR4
+ else # Add other i860-SVR4 vendors below as they are discovered.
+ echo i860-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Unknown i860-SVR4
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mini*:CTIX:SYS*5:*)
+ # "miniframe"
+ echo m68010-convergent-sysv
+ exit 0 ;;
+ M68*:*:R3V[567]*:*)
+ test -r /sysV68 && echo 'm68k-motorola-sysv' && exit 0 ;;
+ 3[34]??:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:3.0 | 4850:*:4.0:3.0)
+ OS_REL=''
+ test -r /etc/.relid \
+ && OS_REL=.`sed -n 's/[^ ]* [^ ]* \([0-9][0-9]\).*/\1/p' < /etc/.relid`
+ /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
+ && echo i486-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0
+ /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | /bin/grep entium >/dev/null \
+ && echo i586-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 ;;
+ 3[34]??:*:4.0:* | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:*)
+ /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
+ && echo i486-ncr-sysv4 && exit 0 ;;
+ m68*:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+ echo m68k-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mc68030:UNIX_System_V:4.*:*)
+ echo m68k-atari-sysv4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ i?86:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+ echo i386-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ TSUNAMI:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+ echo sparc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ rs6000:LynxOS:2.*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+ echo rs6000-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ SM[BE]S:UNIX_SV:*:*)
+ echo mips-dde-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ RM*:SINIX-*:*:*)
+ echo mips-sni-sysv4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:SINIX-*:*:*)
+ if uname -p 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
+ UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -p) 2>/dev/null`
+ echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-sni-sysv4
+ else
+ echo ns32k-sni-sysv
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ PENTIUM:CPunix:4.0*:*) # Unisys `ClearPath HMP IX 4000' SVR4/MP effort
+ # says <Richard.M.Bartel@ccMail.Census.GOV>
+ echo i586-unisys-sysv4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:UNIX_System_V:4*:FTX*)
+ # From Gerald Hewes <hewes@openmarket.com>.
+ # How about differentiating between stratus architectures? -djm
+ echo hppa1.1-stratus-sysv4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ *:*:*:FTX*)
+ # From seanf@swdc.stratus.com.
+ echo i860-stratus-sysv4
+ exit 0 ;;
+ mc68*:A/UX:*:*)
+ echo m68k-apple-aux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ exit 0 ;;
+ R3000:*System_V*:*:* | R4000:UNIX_SYSV:*:*)
+ if [ -d /usr/nec ]; then
+ echo mips-nec-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ else
+ echo mips-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+esac
+
+#echo '(No uname command or uname output not recognized.)' 1>&2
+#echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" 1>&2
+
+cat >dummy.c <<EOF
+#ifdef _SEQUENT_
+# include <sys/types.h>
+# include <sys/utsname.h>
+#endif
+main ()
+{
+#if defined (sony)
+#if defined (MIPSEB)
+ /* BFD wants "bsd" instead of "newsos". Perhaps BFD should be changed,
+ I don't know.... */
+ printf ("mips-sony-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+#include <sys/param.h>
+ printf ("m68k-sony-newsos%s\n",
+#ifdef NEWSOS4
+ "4"
+#else
+ ""
+#endif
+ ); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (__arm) && defined (__acorn) && defined (__unix)
+ printf ("arm-acorn-riscix"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (hp300) && !defined (hpux)
+ printf ("m68k-hp-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (NeXT)
+#if !defined (__ARCHITECTURE__)
+#define __ARCHITECTURE__ "m68k"
+#endif
+ int version;
+ version=`(hostinfo | sed -n 's/.*NeXT Mach \([0-9]*\).*/\1/p') 2>/dev/null`;
+ printf ("%s-next-nextstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version);
+ exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (MULTIMAX) || defined (n16)
+#if defined (UMAXV)
+ printf ("ns32k-encore-sysv\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+#if defined (CMU)
+ printf ("ns32k-encore-mach\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+ printf ("ns32k-encore-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (__386BSD__)
+ printf ("i386-pc-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (sequent)
+#if defined (i386)
+ printf ("i386-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#if defined (ns32000)
+ printf ("ns32k-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (_SEQUENT_)
+ struct utsname un;
+
+ uname(&un);
+
+ if (strncmp(un.version, "V2", 2) == 0) {
+ printf ("i386-sequent-ptx2\n"); exit (0);
+ }
+ if (strncmp(un.version, "V1", 2) == 0) { /* XXX is V1 correct? */
+ printf ("i386-sequent-ptx1\n"); exit (0);
+ }
+ printf ("i386-sequent-ptx\n"); exit (0);
+
+#endif
+
+#if defined (vax)
+#if !defined (ultrix)
+ printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+ printf ("vax-dec-ultrix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (alliant) && defined (i860)
+ printf ("i860-alliant-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+ exit (1);
+}
+EOF
+
+${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy 2>/dev/null && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+rm -f dummy.c dummy
+
+# Apollos put the system type in the environment.
+
+test -d /usr/apollo && { echo ${ISP}-apollo-${SYSTYPE}; exit 0; }
+
+# Convex versions that predate uname can use getsysinfo(1)
+
+if [ -x /usr/convex/getsysinfo ]
+then
+ case `getsysinfo -f cpu_type` in
+ c1*)
+ echo c1-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ c2*)
+ if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
+ then echo c32-convex-bsd
+ else echo c2-convex-bsd
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+ c34*)
+ echo c34-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ c38*)
+ echo c38-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ c4*)
+ echo c4-convex-bsd
+ exit 0 ;;
+ esac
+fi
+
+#echo '(Unable to guess system type)' 1>&2
+
+exit 1
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+# Configuration validation subroutine script, version 1.1.
+# Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# This file is (in principle) common to ALL GNU software.
+# The presence of a machine in this file suggests that SOME GNU software
+# can handle that machine. It does not imply ALL GNU software can.
+#
+# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+# Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# Configuration subroutine to validate and canonicalize a configuration type.
+# Supply the specified configuration type as an argument.
+# If it is invalid, we print an error message on stderr and exit with code 1.
+# Otherwise, we print the canonical config type on stdout and succeed.
+
+# This file is supposed to be the same for all GNU packages
+# and recognize all the CPU types, system types and aliases
+# that are meaningful with *any* GNU software.
+# Each package is responsible for reporting which valid configurations
+# it does not support. The user should be able to distinguish
+# a failure to support a valid configuration from a meaningless
+# configuration.
+
+# The goal of this file is to map all the various variations of a given
+# machine specification into a single specification in the form:
+# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM
+# or in some cases, the newer four-part form:
+# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM
+# It is wrong to echo any other type of specification.
+
+if [ x$1 = x ]
+then
+ echo Configuration name missing. 1>&2
+ echo "Usage: $0 CPU-MFR-OPSYS" 1>&2
+ echo "or $0 ALIAS" 1>&2
+ echo where ALIAS is a recognized configuration type. 1>&2
+ exit 1
+fi
+
+# First pass through any local machine types.
+case $1 in
+ *local*)
+ echo $1
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ *)
+ ;;
+esac
+
+# Separate what the user gave into CPU-COMPANY and OS or KERNEL-OS (if any).
+# Here we must recognize all the valid KERNEL-OS combinations.
+maybe_os=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\2/'`
+case $maybe_os in
+ linux-gnu*)
+ os=-$maybe_os
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\1/'`
+ ;;
+ *)
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/-[^-]*$//'`
+ if [ $basic_machine != $1 ]
+ then os=`echo $1 | sed 's/.*-/-/'`
+ else os=; fi
+ ;;
+esac
+
+### Let's recognize common machines as not being operating systems so
+### that things like config.sub decstation-3100 work. We also
+### recognize some manufacturers as not being operating systems, so we
+### can provide default operating systems below.
+case $os in
+ -sun*os*)
+ # Prevent following clause from handling this invalid input.
+ ;;
+ -dec* | -mips* | -sequent* | -encore* | -pc532* | -sgi* | -sony* | \
+ -att* | -7300* | -3300* | -delta* | -motorola* | -sun[234]* | \
+ -unicom* | -ibm* | -next | -hp | -isi* | -apollo | -altos* | \
+ -convergent* | -ncr* | -news | -32* | -3600* | -3100* | -hitachi* |\
+ -c[123]* | -convex* | -sun | -crds | -omron* | -dg | -ultra | -tti* | \
+ -harris | -dolphin | -highlevel | -gould | -cbm | -ns | -masscomp | \
+ -apple)
+ os=
+ basic_machine=$1
+ ;;
+ -hiux*)
+ os=-hiuxwe2
+ ;;
+ -sco5)
+ os=sco3.2v5
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+ ;;
+ -sco4)
+ os=-sco3.2v4
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+ ;;
+ -sco3.2.[4-9]*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/sco3.2./sco3.2v/'`
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+ ;;
+ -sco3.2v[4-9]*)
+ # Don't forget version if it is 3.2v4 or newer.
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+ ;;
+ -sco*)
+ os=-sco3.2v2
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+ ;;
+ -isc)
+ os=-isc2.2
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+ ;;
+ -clix*)
+ basic_machine=clipper-intergraph
+ ;;
+ -isc*)
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+ ;;
+ -lynx*)
+ os=-lynxos
+ ;;
+ -ptx*)
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-sequent/'`
+ ;;
+ -windowsnt*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/windowsnt/winnt/'`
+ ;;
+ -psos*)
+ os=-psos
+ ;;
+esac
+
+# Decode aliases for certain CPU-COMPANY combinations.
+case $basic_machine in
+ # Recognize the basic CPU types without company name.
+ # Some are omitted here because they have special meanings below.
+ tahoe | i860 | m32r | m68k | m68000 | m88k | ns32k | arm \
+ | arme[lb] | pyramid | mn10300 \
+ | tron | a29k | 580 | i960 | h8300 | hppa | hppa1.0 | hppa1.1 \
+ | alpha | we32k | ns16k | clipper | i370 | sh \
+ | powerpc | powerpcle | 1750a | dsp16xx | mips64 | mipsel \
+ | pdp11 | mips64el | mips64orion | mips64orionel \
+ | sparc | sparclet | sparclite | sparc64)
+ basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown
+ ;;
+ # We use `pc' rather than `unknown'
+ # because (1) that's what they normally are, and
+ # (2) the word "unknown" tends to confuse beginning users.
+ i[3456]86)
+ basic_machine=$basic_machine-pc
+ ;;
+ # Object if more than one company name word.
+ *-*-*)
+ echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+ # Recognize the basic CPU types with company name.
+ vax-* | tahoe-* | i[3456]86-* | i860-* | m32r-* | m68k-* | m68000-* \
+ | m88k-* | sparc-* | ns32k-* | fx80-* | arm-* | c[123]* \
+ | mips-* | pyramid-* | tron-* | a29k-* | romp-* | rs6000-* | power-* \
+ | none-* | 580-* | cray2-* | h8300-* | i960-* | xmp-* | ymp-* \
+ | hppa-* | hppa1.0-* | hppa1.1-* | alpha-* | we32k-* | cydra-* | ns16k-* \
+ | pn-* | np1-* | xps100-* | clipper-* | orion-* | sparclite-* \
+ | pdp11-* | sh-* | powerpc-* | powerpcle-* | sparc64-* | mips64-* | mipsel-* \
+ | mips64el-* | mips64orion-* | mips64orionel-* | f301-*)
+ ;;
+ # Recognize the various machine names and aliases which stand
+ # for a CPU type and a company and sometimes even an OS.
+ 3b1 | 7300 | 7300-att | att-7300 | pc7300 | safari | unixpc)
+ basic_machine=m68000-att
+ ;;
+ 3b*)
+ basic_machine=we32k-att
+ ;;
+ alliant | fx80)
+ basic_machine=fx80-alliant
+ ;;
+ altos | altos3068)
+ basic_machine=m68k-altos
+ ;;
+ am29k)
+ basic_machine=a29k-none
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ amdahl)
+ basic_machine=580-amdahl
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ amiga | amiga-*)
+ basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+ ;;
+ amigados)
+ basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+ os=-amigados
+ ;;
+ amigaunix | amix)
+ basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ apollo68)
+ basic_machine=m68k-apollo
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ aux)
+ basic_machine=m68k-apple
+ os=-aux
+ ;;
+ balance)
+ basic_machine=ns32k-sequent
+ os=-dynix
+ ;;
+ convex-c1)
+ basic_machine=c1-convex
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ convex-c2)
+ basic_machine=c2-convex
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ convex-c32)
+ basic_machine=c32-convex
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ convex-c34)
+ basic_machine=c34-convex
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ convex-c38)
+ basic_machine=c38-convex
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ cray | ymp)
+ basic_machine=ymp-cray
+ os=-unicos
+ ;;
+ cray2)
+ basic_machine=cray2-cray
+ os=-unicos
+ ;;
+ [ctj]90-cray)
+ basic_machine=c90-cray
+ os=-unicos
+ ;;
+ crds | unos)
+ basic_machine=m68k-crds
+ ;;
+ da30 | da30-*)
+ basic_machine=m68k-da30
+ ;;
+ decstation | decstation-3100 | pmax | pmax-* | pmin | dec3100 | decstatn)
+ basic_machine=mips-dec
+ ;;
+ delta | 3300 | motorola-3300 | motorola-delta \
+ | 3300-motorola | delta-motorola)
+ basic_machine=m68k-motorola
+ ;;
+ delta88)
+ basic_machine=m88k-motorola
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ dpx20 | dpx20-*)
+ basic_machine=rs6000-bull
+ os=-bosx
+ ;;
+ dpx2* | dpx2*-bull)
+ basic_machine=m68k-bull
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ ebmon29k)
+ basic_machine=a29k-amd
+ os=-ebmon
+ ;;
+ elxsi)
+ basic_machine=elxsi-elxsi
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ encore | umax | mmax)
+ basic_machine=ns32k-encore
+ ;;
+ fx2800)
+ basic_machine=i860-alliant
+ ;;
+ genix)
+ basic_machine=ns32k-ns
+ ;;
+ gmicro)
+ basic_machine=tron-gmicro
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ h3050r* | hiux*)
+ basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
+ os=-hiuxwe2
+ ;;
+ h8300hms)
+ basic_machine=h8300-hitachi
+ os=-hms
+ ;;
+ harris)
+ basic_machine=m88k-harris
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ hp300-*)
+ basic_machine=m68k-hp
+ ;;
+ hp300bsd)
+ basic_machine=m68k-hp
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ hp300hpux)
+ basic_machine=m68k-hp
+ os=-hpux
+ ;;
+ hp9k2[0-9][0-9] | hp9k31[0-9])
+ basic_machine=m68000-hp
+ ;;
+ hp9k3[2-9][0-9])
+ basic_machine=m68k-hp
+ ;;
+ hp9k7[0-9][0-9] | hp7[0-9][0-9] | hp9k8[0-9]7 | hp8[0-9]7)
+ basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+ ;;
+ hp9k8[0-9][0-9] | hp8[0-9][0-9])
+ basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
+ ;;
+ hppa-next)
+ os=-nextstep3
+ ;;
+ i370-ibm* | ibm*)
+ basic_machine=i370-ibm
+ os=-mvs
+ ;;
+# I'm not sure what "Sysv32" means. Should this be sysv3.2?
+ i[3456]86v32)
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+ os=-sysv32
+ ;;
+ i[3456]86v4*)
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ i[3456]86v)
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ i[3456]86sol2)
+ basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+ os=-solaris2
+ ;;
+ iris | iris4d)
+ basic_machine=mips-sgi
+ case $os in
+ -irix*)
+ ;;
+ *)
+ os=-irix4
+ ;;
+ esac
+ ;;
+ isi68 | isi)
+ basic_machine=m68k-isi
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ m88k-omron*)
+ basic_machine=m88k-omron
+ ;;
+ magnum | m3230)
+ basic_machine=mips-mips
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ merlin)
+ basic_machine=ns32k-utek
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ miniframe)
+ basic_machine=m68000-convergent
+ ;;
+ mipsel*-linux*)
+ basic_machine=mipsel-unknown
+ os=-linux
+ ;;
+ mips*-linux*)
+ basic_machine=mips-unknown
+ os=-linux
+ ;;
+ mips3*-*)
+ basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`
+ ;;
+ mips3*)
+ basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`-unknown
+ ;;
+ ncr3000)
+ basic_machine=i486-ncr
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ news | news700 | news800 | news900)
+ basic_machine=m68k-sony
+ os=-newsos
+ ;;
+ news1000)
+ basic_machine=m68030-sony
+ os=-newsos
+ ;;
+ news-3600 | risc-news)
+ basic_machine=mips-sony
+ os=-newsos
+ ;;
+ next | m*-next )
+ basic_machine=m68k-next
+ case $os in
+ -nextstep* )
+ ;;
+ -ns2*)
+ os=-nextstep2
+ ;;
+ *)
+ os=-nextstep3
+ ;;
+ esac
+ ;;
+ nh3000)
+ basic_machine=m68k-harris
+ os=-cxux
+ ;;
+ nh[45]000)
+ basic_machine=m88k-harris
+ os=-cxux
+ ;;
+ nindy960)
+ basic_machine=i960-intel
+ os=-nindy
+ ;;
+ np1)
+ basic_machine=np1-gould
+ ;;
+ pa-hitachi)
+ basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
+ os=-hiuxwe2
+ ;;
+ paragon)
+ basic_machine=i860-intel
+ os=-osf
+ ;;
+ pbd)
+ basic_machine=sparc-tti
+ ;;
+ pbb)
+ basic_machine=m68k-tti
+ ;;
+ pc532 | pc532-*)
+ basic_machine=ns32k-pc532
+ ;;
+ pentium | p5)
+ basic_machine=i586-intel
+ ;;
+ pentiumpro | p6)
+ basic_machine=i686-intel
+ ;;
+ pentium-* | p5-*)
+ basic_machine=i586-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+ ;;
+ pentiumpro-* | p6-*)
+ basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+ ;;
+ k5)
+ # We don't have specific support for AMD's K5 yet, so just call it a Pentium
+ basic_machine=i586-amd
+ ;;
+ nexen)
+ # We don't have specific support for Nexgen yet, so just call it a Pentium
+ basic_machine=i586-nexgen
+ ;;
+ pn)
+ basic_machine=pn-gould
+ ;;
+ power) basic_machine=rs6000-ibm
+ ;;
+ ppc) basic_machine=powerpc-unknown
+ ;;
+ ppc-*) basic_machine=powerpc-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+ ;;
+ ppcle | powerpclittle | ppc-le | powerpc-little)
+ basic_machine=powerpcle-unknown
+ ;;
+ ppcle-* | powerpclittle-*)
+ basic_machine=powerpcle-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+ ;;
+ ps2)
+ basic_machine=i386-ibm
+ ;;
+ rm[46]00)
+ basic_machine=mips-siemens
+ ;;
+ rtpc | rtpc-*)
+ basic_machine=romp-ibm
+ ;;
+ sequent)
+ basic_machine=i386-sequent
+ ;;
+ sh)
+ basic_machine=sh-hitachi
+ os=-hms
+ ;;
+ sps7)
+ basic_machine=m68k-bull
+ os=-sysv2
+ ;;
+ spur)
+ basic_machine=spur-unknown
+ ;;
+ sun2)
+ basic_machine=m68000-sun
+ ;;
+ sun2os3)
+ basic_machine=m68000-sun
+ os=-sunos3
+ ;;
+ sun2os4)
+ basic_machine=m68000-sun
+ os=-sunos4
+ ;;
+ sun3os3)
+ basic_machine=m68k-sun
+ os=-sunos3
+ ;;
+ sun3os4)
+ basic_machine=m68k-sun
+ os=-sunos4
+ ;;
+ sun4os3)
+ basic_machine=sparc-sun
+ os=-sunos3
+ ;;
+ sun4os4)
+ basic_machine=sparc-sun
+ os=-sunos4
+ ;;
+ sun4sol2)
+ basic_machine=sparc-sun
+ os=-solaris2
+ ;;
+ sun3 | sun3-*)
+ basic_machine=m68k-sun
+ ;;
+ sun4)
+ basic_machine=sparc-sun
+ ;;
+ sun386 | sun386i | roadrunner)
+ basic_machine=i386-sun
+ ;;
+ symmetry)
+ basic_machine=i386-sequent
+ os=-dynix
+ ;;
+ tower | tower-32)
+ basic_machine=m68k-ncr
+ ;;
+ udi29k)
+ basic_machine=a29k-amd
+ os=-udi
+ ;;
+ ultra3)
+ basic_machine=a29k-nyu
+ os=-sym1
+ ;;
+ vaxv)
+ basic_machine=vax-dec
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ vms)
+ basic_machine=vax-dec
+ os=-vms
+ ;;
+ vpp*|vx|vx-*)
+ basic_machine=f301-fujitsu
+ ;;
+ vxworks960)
+ basic_machine=i960-wrs
+ os=-vxworks
+ ;;
+ vxworks68)
+ basic_machine=m68k-wrs
+ os=-vxworks
+ ;;
+ vxworks29k)
+ basic_machine=a29k-wrs
+ os=-vxworks
+ ;;
+ xmp)
+ basic_machine=xmp-cray
+ os=-unicos
+ ;;
+ xps | xps100)
+ basic_machine=xps100-honeywell
+ ;;
+ none)
+ basic_machine=none-none
+ os=-none
+ ;;
+
+# Here we handle the default manufacturer of certain CPU types. It is in
+# some cases the only manufacturer, in others, it is the most popular.
+ mips)
+ if [ x$os = x-linux ]; then
+ basic_machine=mips-unknown
+ else
+ basic_machine=mips-mips
+ fi
+ ;;
+ romp)
+ basic_machine=romp-ibm
+ ;;
+ rs6000)
+ basic_machine=rs6000-ibm
+ ;;
+ vax)
+ basic_machine=vax-dec
+ ;;
+ pdp11)
+ basic_machine=pdp11-dec
+ ;;
+ we32k)
+ basic_machine=we32k-att
+ ;;
+ sparc)
+ basic_machine=sparc-sun
+ ;;
+ cydra)
+ basic_machine=cydra-cydrome
+ ;;
+ orion)
+ basic_machine=orion-highlevel
+ ;;
+ orion105)
+ basic_machine=clipper-highlevel
+ ;;
+ *)
+ echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+esac
+
+# Here we canonicalize certain aliases for manufacturers.
+case $basic_machine in
+ *-digital*)
+ basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/digital.*/dec/'`
+ ;;
+ *-commodore*)
+ basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/commodore.*/cbm/'`
+ ;;
+ *)
+ ;;
+esac
+
+# Decode manufacturer-specific aliases for certain operating systems.
+
+if [ x"$os" != x"" ]
+then
+case $os in
+ # First match some system type aliases
+ # that might get confused with valid system types.
+ # -solaris* is a basic system type, with this one exception.
+ -solaris1 | -solaris1.*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|solaris1|sunos4|'`
+ ;;
+ -solaris)
+ os=-solaris2
+ ;;
+ -unixware* | svr4*)
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ -gnu/linux*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|gnu/linux|linux-gnu|'`
+ ;;
+ # First accept the basic system types.
+ # The portable systems comes first.
+ # Each alternative MUST END IN A *, to match a version number.
+ # -sysv* is not here because it comes later, after sysvr4.
+ -gnu* | -bsd* | -mach* | -minix* | -genix* | -ultrix* | -irix* \
+ | -*vms* | -sco* | -esix* | -isc* | -aix* | -sunos | -sunos[34]*\
+ | -hpux* | -unos* | -osf* | -luna* | -dgux* | -solaris* | -sym* \
+ | -amigados* | -msdos* | -newsos* | -unicos* | -aof* | -aos* \
+ | -nindy* | -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -ebmon* | -hms* | -mvs* \
+ | -clix* | -riscos* | -uniplus* | -iris* | -rtu* | -xenix* \
+ | -hiux* | -386bsd* | -netbsd* | -openbsd* | -freebsd* | -riscix* \
+ | -lynxos* | -bosx* | -nextstep* | -cxux* | -aout* | -elf* \
+ | -ptx* | -coff* | -ecoff* | -winnt* | -domain* | -vsta* \
+ | -udi* | -eabi* | -lites* | -ieee* | -go32* | -aux* \
+ | -cygwin32* | -pe* | -psos* | -moss* | -proelf* | -rtems* \
+ | -linux-gnu* | -uxpv*)
+ # Remember, each alternative MUST END IN *, to match a version number.
+ ;;
+ -linux*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|linux|linux-gnu|'`
+ ;;
+ -sunos5*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos5|solaris2|'`
+ ;;
+ -sunos6*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos6|solaris3|'`
+ ;;
+ -osfrose*)
+ os=-osfrose
+ ;;
+ -osf*)
+ os=-osf
+ ;;
+ -utek*)
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ -dynix*)
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ -acis*)
+ os=-aos
+ ;;
+ -ctix* | -uts*)
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ -ns2 )
+ os=-nextstep2
+ ;;
+ # Preserve the version number of sinix5.
+ -sinix5.*)
+ os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sinix|sysv|'`
+ ;;
+ -sinix*)
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ -triton*)
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ -oss*)
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ -svr4)
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ -svr3)
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ -sysvr4)
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ # This must come after -sysvr4.
+ -sysv*)
+ ;;
+ -xenix)
+ os=-xenix
+ ;;
+ -none)
+ ;;
+ *)
+ # Get rid of the `-' at the beginning of $os.
+ os=`echo $os | sed 's/[^-]*-//'`
+ echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': system \`$os\' not recognized 1>&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+esac
+else
+
+# Here we handle the default operating systems that come with various machines.
+# The value should be what the vendor currently ships out the door with their
+# machine or put another way, the most popular os provided with the machine.
+
+# Note that if you're going to try to match "-MANUFACTURER" here (say,
+# "-sun"), then you have to tell the case statement up towards the top
+# that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating system. Otherwise, code above
+# will signal an error saying that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating
+# system, and we'll never get to this point.
+
+case $basic_machine in
+ *-acorn)
+ os=-riscix1.2
+ ;;
+ arm*-semi)
+ os=-aout
+ ;;
+ pdp11-*)
+ os=-none
+ ;;
+ *-dec | vax-*)
+ os=-ultrix4.2
+ ;;
+ m68*-apollo)
+ os=-domain
+ ;;
+ i386-sun)
+ os=-sunos4.0.2
+ ;;
+ m68000-sun)
+ os=-sunos3
+ # This also exists in the configure program, but was not the
+ # default.
+ # os=-sunos4
+ ;;
+ *-tti) # must be before sparc entry or we get the wrong os.
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ sparc-* | *-sun)
+ os=-sunos4.1.1
+ ;;
+ *-ibm)
+ os=-aix
+ ;;
+ *-hp)
+ os=-hpux
+ ;;
+ *-hitachi)
+ os=-hiux
+ ;;
+ i860-* | *-att | *-ncr | *-altos | *-motorola | *-convergent)
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ *-cbm)
+ os=-amigados
+ ;;
+ *-dg)
+ os=-dgux
+ ;;
+ *-dolphin)
+ os=-sysv3
+ ;;
+ m68k-ccur)
+ os=-rtu
+ ;;
+ m88k-omron*)
+ os=-luna
+ ;;
+ *-next )
+ os=-nextstep
+ ;;
+ *-sequent)
+ os=-ptx
+ ;;
+ *-crds)
+ os=-unos
+ ;;
+ *-ns)
+ os=-genix
+ ;;
+ i370-*)
+ os=-mvs
+ ;;
+ *-next)
+ os=-nextstep3
+ ;;
+ *-gould)
+ os=-sysv
+ ;;
+ *-highlevel)
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ *-encore)
+ os=-bsd
+ ;;
+ *-sgi)
+ os=-irix
+ ;;
+ *-siemens)
+ os=-sysv4
+ ;;
+ *-masscomp)
+ os=-rtu
+ ;;
+ f301-fujitsu)
+ os=-uxpv
+ ;;
+ *)
+ os=-none
+ ;;
+esac
+fi
+
+# Here we handle the case where we know the os, and the CPU type, but not the
+# manufacturer. We pick the logical manufacturer.
+vendor=unknown
+case $basic_machine in
+ *-unknown)
+ case $os in
+ -riscix*)
+ vendor=acorn
+ ;;
+ -sunos*)
+ vendor=sun
+ ;;
+ -aix*)
+ vendor=ibm
+ ;;
+ -hpux*)
+ vendor=hp
+ ;;
+ -hiux*)
+ vendor=hitachi
+ ;;
+ -unos*)
+ vendor=crds
+ ;;
+ -dgux*)
+ vendor=dg
+ ;;
+ -luna*)
+ vendor=omron
+ ;;
+ -genix*)
+ vendor=ns
+ ;;
+ -mvs*)
+ vendor=ibm
+ ;;
+ -ptx*)
+ vendor=sequent
+ ;;
+ -vxsim* | -vxworks*)
+ vendor=wrs
+ ;;
+ -aux*)
+ vendor=apple
+ ;;
+ esac
+ basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed "s/unknown/$vendor/"`
+ ;;
+esac
+
+echo $basic_machine$os
--- /dev/null
+dnl -*-fundamental-*-
+dnl
+dnl $Id: configure.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+dnl
+dnl Configuring the Common Files Distribution
+dnl
+dnl (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+dnl
+
+dnl----- Licensing notice ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common')
+dnl
+dnl `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+dnl (at your option) any later version.
+dnl
+dnl `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+dnl GNU General Public License for more details.
+dnl
+dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+dnl along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+dnl Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+dnl----- Revision history ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl $Log: configure.in,v $
+dnl Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+dnl Initial revision
+dnl
+dnl Revision 1.1.1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+dnl New import. The old CVS repository was lost in a disk disaster.
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(common, 1.2.0)
+
+AC_INIT(mklinks.in)
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(common, 1.2.4)
+AM_PROG_INSTALL
+AC_ARG_PROGRAM
+AC_OUTPUT(Makefile mklinks findlinks txtlib mkaclocal)
--- /dev/null
+#!/bin/sh
+# Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# François Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>, 1995.
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# This script byte-compiles all `.el' files which are part of its
+# arguments, using GNU Emacs, and put the resulting `.elc' files into
+# the current directory, so disregarding the original directories used
+# in `.el' arguments.
+#
+# This script manages in such a way that all Emacs LISP files to
+# be compiled are made visible between themselves, in the event
+# they require or load-library one another.
+
+if test $# = 0; then
+ echo 1>&2 "No files given to $0"
+ exit 1
+else
+ if test -z "$EMACS" || test "$EMACS" = "t"; then
+ # Value of "t" means we are running in a shell under Emacs.
+ # Just assume Emacs is called "emacs".
+ EMACS=emacs
+ fi
+
+ tempdir=elc.$$
+ mkdir $tempdir
+ cp $* $tempdir
+ cd $tempdir
+
+ echo "(setq load-path (cons nil load-path))" > script
+ $EMACS -q -batch -l script -f batch-byte-compile *.el
+ mv *.elc ..
+
+ cd ..
+ rm -fr $tempdir
+fi
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: findlinks.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Find files which could be links to the repository
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log: findlinks.in,v $
+# Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+# Initial revision
+#
+
+# --- Configuration variables ---
+
+prefix=@prefix@
+datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@
+
+# --- Parse command line arguments ---
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+ case $1 in
+ -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+ cat <<EOF
+Usage: findlinks
+
+Scans the current directory and any subdirectories, writing the names of
+files which could be linked into the shared files repository to standard
+output. This list could be used as input to the \`mklinks' command.
+EOF
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+ version=`echo '$Revision: 1.1 $' |
+ sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+ echo "findlinks $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ *)
+ echo "findlinks: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+ esac
+ shift
+done
+
+# --- Read the names of all the files I support ---
+#
+# Yes, this is ugly and hacky: well spotted. Shells have a nasty habit of
+# spontaneously forking when redirection gets too hard for them to think
+# about, so instead of something nice along the lines of
+#
+# find ... | while read name; do <build `files'> done
+#
+# I have to stick the whole lot in backticks and echo the result when it's
+# all done. Yuk.
+#
+# Oh, I almost forgot: that colon on the end there, that's to make sure that
+# all the entries are surrounded by colons on both sides, which makes the
+# pattern match in the `case' below work properly.
+
+files=`
+ files=""
+ find $datadir -type f -print | { while read name; do
+ files="$files:\`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'\`"
+ done
+ echo $files; } `:
+
+# --- Now examine the current directory ---
+#
+# Remember to include things which are already linked, so that users can say
+# `findlinks >.links' without any problems.
+
+find . \( -type f -o -type l \) -print | while read name; do
+ base="`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'`"
+ case "$files" in
+ *:$base:*)
+ echo $name
+ ;;
+ *)
+ esac
+done | sed -e 's,^\./,,' | sort
--- /dev/null
+% \iffalse <meta-comment>
+%
+% $Id: gpl.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+%
+% The GNU General Public License as a LaTeX section
+%
+% (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+% LaTeX markup and minor formatting changes by Mark Wooding
+%
+
+%----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% $Log: gpl.tex,v $
+% Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+% --- Previous lives ---
+%
+% %Log: gpl.tex,v %
+% Revision 1.3 1997/07/29 19:49:51 mdw
+% Fix address of the FSF.
+%
+% Revision 1.2 1997/04/28 19:32:26 mdw
+% Fix spelling of `License' so that it's American and wrong.
+% Also use copyright symbol since I have one, and reformat the verbatim
+% text a lttle.
+%
+% Revision 1.1 1996/11/19 20:51:14 mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+
+% --- Chapter heading ---
+%
+% We don't know whether this ought to be a section or a chapter. Easy.
+% We'll see if chapters are possible.
+%
+% \fi
+
+\begingroup
+\makeatletter
+
+\edef\next#1#2#3{\relax
+ \ifx\chapter\@@undefined
+ \ifx\documentclass\@notprerr#2\else#3\fi
+ \else#1\fi
+}
+
+\expandafter\endgroup\next
+{
+ \let\gpltoplevel\chapter
+ \let\gplsec\section
+ \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+ \let\gpltoplevel\section
+ \let\gplsec\subsection
+ \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+ \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+ \def\gpltoplevel#1{%
+ \vspace*{1in}%
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\LARGE\bfseries#1\hfil}%
+ \vspace{1in}%
+ }
+ \let\gplsec\section
+ \def\gplend{\end{document}}
+ \advance\textwidth1in
+ \advance\oddsidemargin-.5in
+ \sloppy
+ \begin{document}
+}
+
+%^^A-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\gpltoplevel{The GNU General Public License}
+
+
+The following is the text of the GNU General Public License, under the terms
+of which this software is distrubuted.
+
+\vspace{12pt}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE} \\
+Version 2, June 1991
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{center}
+Copyright \copyright\ 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. \\
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies \\
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Preamble}
+
+The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
+share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended
+to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software---to make sure
+the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies
+to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program
+whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation
+software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You
+can apply it to your programs, too.
+
+When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
+General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom
+to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
+wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you
+can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
+you know you can do these things.
+
+To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to
+deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These
+restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
+copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or
+for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You
+must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you
+must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2)
+offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
+and/or modify the software.
+
+Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that
+everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If
+the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
+recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
+problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors'
+reputations.
+
+Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We
+wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will
+individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
+proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
+licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification
+follow.
+
+
+\gplsec{Terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\makeatletter \setcounter{\@listctr}{-1} \makeatother
+
+\item [0.] This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
+ notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+ under the terms of this General Public License. The ``Program'',
+ below, refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the
+ Program'' means either the Program or any derivative work under
+ copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
+ portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+ into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
+ limitation in the term ``modification''.) Each licensee is addressed
+ as ``you''.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+ covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+ running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+ is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
+ (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that
+ is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+\item [1.] You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+ source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+ conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+ copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+ notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+ and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+ along with the Program.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+ you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+\item [2.] You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+ of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+ distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+ above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+
+ \item [(a)] You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
+ notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
+ change.
+
+ \item [(b)] You must cause any work that you distribute or publish,
+ that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program
+ or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to
+ all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ \item [(c)] If the modified program normally reads commands
+ interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running
+ for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or
+ display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice
+ and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
+ provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program
+ under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy
+ of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is
+ interactive but does not normally print such an announcement,
+ your work based on the Program is not required to print an
+ announcement.)
+
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+ identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+ and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+ themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+ sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+ distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+ on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+ this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+ entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+ it.
+
+ Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+ your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+ exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+ collective works based on the Program.
+
+ In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+ with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a
+ storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
+ scope of this License.
+
+\item [3.] You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+ under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+ Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+
+ \item [(a)] Accompany it with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the
+ terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
+ software interchange; or,
+
+ \item [(b)] Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ \item [(c)] Accompany it with the information you received as to the
+ offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative
+ is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+ making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+ code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+ associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
+ compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
+ exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
+ is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
+ major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system
+ on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+ the executable.
+
+ If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access
+ to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to
+ copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the
+ source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
+ source along with the object code.
+
+\item [4.] You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+ except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise
+ to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
+ automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
+ parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+ License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties
+ remain in full compliance.
+
+\item [5.] You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+ signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+ distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+ prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+ modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+ Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+ all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
+ Program or works based on it.
+
+\item [6.] Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+ Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+ original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+ these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+ restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+ You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+ this License.
+
+\item [7.] If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+ infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+ conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+ otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+ excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+ distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+ License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+ may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+ license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+ all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+ the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+ refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+ If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+ any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+ apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+ circumstances.
+
+ It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+ patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+ such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+ integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+ implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+ generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+ through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+ system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+ to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+ impose that choice.
+
+ This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+ be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+\item [8.] If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+ certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+ original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may
+ add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
+ countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
+ not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
+ limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+\item [9.] The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+ versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new
+ versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+ differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+ Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+ specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+ ``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and
+ conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+ the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
+ version number of this License, you may choose any version ever
+ published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+\item [10.] If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+ programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the
+ author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the
+ Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
+ sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the
+ two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
+ software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+\begin{center}
+NO WARRANTY
+\end{center}
+
+\bfseries
+
+\item [11.] Because the Program is licensed free of charge, there is no
+ warranty for the Program, to the extent permitted by applicable law.
+ except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or
+ other parties provide the program ``as is'' without warranty of any
+ kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
+ implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
+ purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the
+ Program is with you. Should the Program prove defective, you assume
+ the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction.
+
+\item [12.] In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
+ writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify
+ and/or redistribute the program as permitted above, be liable to you
+ for damages, including any general, special, incidental or
+ consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the
+ program (including but not limited to loss of data or data being
+ rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a
+ failure of the Program to operate with any other programs), even if
+ such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such
+ damages.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS}
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs}
+
+If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
+use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software
+which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to
+attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the
+exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the ``copyright''
+line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+Copyright (C) 19yy <name of author>
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+(at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when
+it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type
+`show w'.
+This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be
+called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public
+License instead of this License.
+
+\gplend
--- /dev/null
+@c This GPL is meant to be included from other files.
+@c To format a standalone GPL, use license.texi.
+
+@center Version 2, June 1991
+
+@display
+Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+@end display
+
+@unnumberedsec Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software---to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+@iftex
+@unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end ifinfo
+
+@enumerate 0
+@item
+This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The ``Program'', below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the Program''
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term ``modification''.) Each licensee is addressed as ``you''.
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+@item
+You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+@item
+You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+@item
+You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+parties under the terms of this License.
+
+@item
+If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+@end enumerate
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+@item
+You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+@item
+Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+@item
+Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+received the program in object code or executable form with such
+an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+@end enumerate
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+@item
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+@item
+You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+@item
+Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+@item
+If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+@item
+If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+@item
+The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any
+later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+@item
+If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+@iftex
+@vskip -@baselineskip
+@vskip -@baselineskip
+@heading NO WARRANTY
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center NO WARRANTY
+@end ifinfo
+
+@item
+BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+@item
+IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+@end enumerate
+
+@iftex
+@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end ifinfo
+
+@page
+@unnumberedsec How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+@smallexample
+@var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
+Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+@end smallexample
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+@smallexample
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
+for details.
+@end smallexample
+
+The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and
+@samp{show c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever
+suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+@example
+@group
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written
+by James Hacker.
+
+@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+@end group
+@end example
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
--- /dev/null
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# install - install a program, script, or datafile
+# This comes from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh).
+#
+# Copyright 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
+#
+# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
+# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
+# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+# documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or
+# publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
+# written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the
+# suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is"
+# without express or implied warranty.
+#
+# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
+# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
+# when there is no Makefile.
+#
+# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
+# from scratch. It can only install one file at a time, a restriction
+# shared with many OS's install programs.
+
+
+# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
+
+# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
+doit="${DOITPROG-}"
+
+
+# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
+
+mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
+cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
+chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
+chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
+chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
+stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
+rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
+mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
+
+transformbasename=""
+transform_arg=""
+instcmd="$mvprog"
+chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755"
+chowncmd=""
+chgrpcmd=""
+stripcmd=""
+rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+mvcmd="$mvprog"
+src=""
+dst=""
+dir_arg=""
+
+while [ x"$1" != x ]; do
+ case $1 in
+ -c) instcmd="$cpprog"
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ -d) dir_arg=true
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2"
+ shift
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
+ shift
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
+ shift
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ -s) stripcmd="$stripprog"
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ -t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'`
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ -b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'`
+ shift
+ continue;;
+
+ *) if [ x"$src" = x ]
+ then
+ src=$1
+ else
+ # this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug
+ :
+ dst=$1
+ fi
+ shift
+ continue;;
+ esac
+done
+
+if [ x"$src" = x ]
+then
+ echo "install: no input file specified"
+ exit 1
+else
+ true
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then
+ dst=$src
+ src=""
+
+ if [ -d $dst ]; then
+ instcmd=:
+ else
+ instcmd=mkdir
+ fi
+else
+
+# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command
+# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
+# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
+
+ if [ -f $src -o -d $src ]
+ then
+ true
+ else
+ echo "install: $src does not exist"
+ exit 1
+ fi
+
+ if [ x"$dst" = x ]
+ then
+ echo "install: no destination specified"
+ exit 1
+ else
+ true
+ fi
+
+# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system
+# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic
+
+ if [ -d $dst ]
+ then
+ dst="$dst"/`basename $src`
+ else
+ true
+ fi
+fi
+
+## this sed command emulates the dirname command
+dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'`
+
+# Make sure that the destination directory exists.
+# this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script
+
+# Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case.
+if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then
+defaultIFS='
+'
+IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}"
+
+oIFS="${IFS}"
+# Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason.
+IFS='%'
+set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'`
+IFS="${oIFS}"
+
+pathcomp=''
+
+while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do
+ pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}"
+ shift
+
+ if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ;
+ then
+ $mkdirprog "${pathcomp}"
+ else
+ true
+ fi
+
+ pathcomp="${pathcomp}/"
+done
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]
+then
+ $doit $instcmd $dst &&
+
+ if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+ if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+ if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+ if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi
+else
+
+# If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now.
+
+ if [ x"$transformarg" = x ]
+ then
+ dstfile=`basename $dst`
+ else
+ dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename |
+ sed $transformarg`$transformbasename
+ fi
+
+# don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename
+
+ if [ x"$dstfile" = x ]
+ then
+ dstfile=`basename $dst`
+ else
+ true
+ fi
+
+# Make a temp file name in the proper directory.
+
+ dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$#
+
+# Move or copy the file name to the temp name
+
+ $doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp &&
+
+ trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 &&
+
+# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits
+
+# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to
+# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
+# errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command.
+
+ if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+ if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+ if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+ if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+
+# Now rename the file to the real destination.
+
+ $doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile &&
+ $doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile
+
+fi &&
+
+
+exit 0
--- /dev/null
+% \iffalse <meta-comment>
+%
+% $Id: lgpl.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+%
+% The GNU Library General Public License as a LaTeX section
+%
+% (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+% LaTeX markup and minor formatting changes by Mark Wooding
+%
+
+%----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% $Log: lgpl.tex,v $
+% Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+
+% --- Chapter heading ---
+%
+% We don't know whether this ought to be a section or a chapter. Easy.
+% We'll see if chapters are possible.
+%
+% \fi
+
+\begingroup
+\makeatletter
+
+\edef\next#1#2#3{\relax
+ \ifx\chapter\@@undefined
+ \ifx\documentclass\@notprerr#2\else#3\fi
+ \else#1\fi
+}
+
+\expandafter\endgroup\next
+{
+ \let\gpltoplevel\chapter
+ \let\gplsec\section
+ \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+ \let\gpltoplevel\section
+ \let\gplsec\subsection
+ \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+ \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+ \def\gpltoplevel#1{%
+ \vspace*{1in}%
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\LARGE\bfseries#1\hfil}%
+ \vspace{1in}%
+ }
+ \let\gplsec\section
+ \def\gplend{\end{document}}
+ \advance\textwidth1in
+ \advance\oddsidemargin-.5in
+ \sloppy
+ \begin{document}
+}
+
+%^^A-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\gpltoplevel{The GNU Library General Public License}
+
+The following is the text of the GNU Library General Public License, under
+the terms of which this software is distrubuted.
+
+\vspace{12pt}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE} \\
+Version 2, June 1991
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{center}
+Copyright \copyright\ 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. \\
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies \\
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Preamble}
+
+The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
+share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
+intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make
+sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially
+designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries
+whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too.
+
+When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
+General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom
+to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
+wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you
+can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
+you know you can do these things.
+
+To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to
+deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These
+restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
+copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a
+fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
+make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a
+program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
+recipients so that they can relink them with the library, after making
+changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these
+terms so they know their rights.
+
+Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the
+library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to
+copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that
+everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library. If the
+library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
+know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems
+introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
+
+Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We
+wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will
+individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program
+into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU
+General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one;
+be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same
+as in the ordinary license.
+
+The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they
+blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a program
+and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing the
+library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to
+running a utility program or application program. However, in a textual and
+legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the
+original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such.
+
+Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public
+License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because
+most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker
+conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of
+those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries
+themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to permit
+developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your
+freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are
+incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards
+changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the
+actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead to faster
+development of free libraries.
+
+The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification
+follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a ``work based on the
+library'' and a ``work that uses the library''. The former contains code
+derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the
+library.
+
+Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General
+Public License rather than by this special one.
+
+
+\gplsec{Terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\makeatletter \setcounter{\@listctr}{-1} \makeatother
+
+\item [0.] This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+ contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+ party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+ General Public License (also called ``this License''). Each licensee
+ is addressed as ``you''.
+
+ A ``library'' means a collection of software functions and/or data
+ prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+ (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The ``Library'', below, refers to any such software library or work
+ which has been distributed under these terms. A ``work based on the
+ Library'' means either the Library or any derivative work under
+ copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+ portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+ straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+ included without limitation in the term ``modification''.)
+
+ ``Source code'' for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+ making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+ all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+ interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
+ compilation and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+ covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+ running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+ such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+ on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+ writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and
+ what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+\item [1.] You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+ complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+ you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+ copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+ notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+ and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+ you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+\item [2.] You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+ of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+ distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+ above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+
+ \item [(a)] The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+ \item [(b)] You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
+ notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
+ change.
+
+ \item [(c)] You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+ charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ \item [(d)] If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function
+ or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that
+ uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the
+ facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to
+ ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
+ function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
+ whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+ (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+ a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+ application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+ application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+ be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+ root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+ identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+ and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+ themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+ sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+ distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+ on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+ this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+ entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+ it.
+
+ Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+ your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+ exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+ collective works based on the Library.
+
+ In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+ with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a
+ storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
+ scope of this License.
+
+\item [3.] You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+ License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+ this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+ that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+ instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+ that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+ these notices.
+
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that
+ copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+ subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the
+ Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+\item [4.] You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+ derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+ under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+ it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+ must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+ medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from
+ a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source
+ code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
+ source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
+ source along with the object code.
+
+\item [5.] A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+ Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+ linked with it, is called a ``work that uses the Library''. Such a
+ work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+ therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library
+ creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+ contains portions of the Library), rather than a ``work that uses the
+ library''. The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+ Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a ``work that uses the Library'' uses material from a header file
+ that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+ derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+ Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+ linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+ threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure
+ layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten
+ lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is
+ unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
+ (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library
+ will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+ distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+ Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether
+ or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+\item [6.] As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+ link a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library to produce a
+ work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under
+ terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of
+ the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for
+ debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+ Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+ this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+ during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+ copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+ directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+ of these things:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+
+ \item [(a)] Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+ changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+ Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+ with the Library, with the complete machine-readable ``work that
+ uses the Library'', as object code and/or source code, so that
+ the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a
+ modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is
+ understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions
+ files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
+ the application to use the modified definitions.)
+
+ \item [(b)] Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+ least three years, to give the same user the materials specified
+ in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
+ performing this distribution.
+
+ \item [(c)] If distribution of the work is made by offering access to
+ copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the
+ above specified materials from the same place.
+
+ \item [(d)] Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+ materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the ``work that uses the
+ Library'' must include any data and utility programs needed for
+ reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+ the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+ distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+ components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+ which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+ the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+ restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+ accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+ use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+ distribute.
+
+\item [7.] You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+ Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+ facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+ library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+ the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+ permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+
+ \item [(a)] Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+ based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+ facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+ Sections above.
+
+ \item [(b)] Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+ that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+ where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+\item [8.] You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+ the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+ attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+ the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+ this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
+ from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so
+ long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+\item [9.] You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+ signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+ distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+ prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+ modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+ Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+ all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
+ Library or works based on it.
+
+\item [10.] Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+ Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+ original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+ subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+ restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+ You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+ this License.
+
+\item [11.] If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+ infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+ conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+ otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+ excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+ distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+ License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+ may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+ license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+ all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+ the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+ refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+ If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+ any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+ apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+ circumstances.
+
+ It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+ patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+ such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+ integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented
+ by public license practices. Many people have made generous
+ contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that
+ system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up
+ to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute
+ software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that
+ choice.
+
+ This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+ be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+\item [12.] If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+ certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+ original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may
+ add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
+ countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
+ not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
+ limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+\item [13.] The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+ versions of the Library General Public License from time to time. Such
+ new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+ differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+ Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+ specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+ ``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and
+ conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+ the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+ license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+ the Free Software Foundation.
+
+\item [14.] If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+ programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+ write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+ copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
+ be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
+ derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse
+ of software generally.
+
+\begin{center}
+NO WARRANTY
+\end{center}
+
+\bfseries
+
+\item [15.] Because the Library is licensed free of charge, there is no
+ warranty for the Library, to the extent permitted by applicable law.
+ Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or
+ other parties provide the Library ``as is'' without warranty of any
+ kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
+ implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
+ purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the
+ Library is with you. Should the Library prove defective, you assume
+ the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction.
+
+\item [16.] In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
+ writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify
+ and/or redistribute the Library as permitted above, be liable to you
+ for damages, including any general, special, incidental or
+ consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the
+ Library (including but not limited to loss of data or data being
+ rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a
+ failure of the Library to operate with any other software), even if
+ such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such
+ damages.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS}
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Appendix: How to apply these terms to your new libraries}
+
+If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
+use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can
+redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under
+these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
+Public License).
+
+To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
+
+This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+Library General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License
+along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the library, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James
+Random Hacker.
+
+<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+\end{verbatim}
+
+That's all there is to it!
+
+\gplend
--- /dev/null
+@c This LGPL is meant to be included from other files.
+@c To format a standalone LGPL, use liblic.texi.
+
+@ifset lgpl-appendix
+@appendix GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+@end ifset
+
+@ifclear lgpl-appendix
+@unnumbered GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+@end ifclear
+@center Version 2, June 1991
+
+@display
+Copyright @copyright{} 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is
+ numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
+@end display
+
+@unnumberedsec Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software---to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+ This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
+other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
+your libraries, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
+you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
+with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+ Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
+the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+ Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
+version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
+the original authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
+software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
+transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this,
+we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
+free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
+GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary
+one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
+the same as in the ordinary license.
+
+ The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
+they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
+program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without
+changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
+analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in
+a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
+derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
+treats it as such.
+
+ Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
+Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
+sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We
+concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+ However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
+users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
+libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to
+permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
+preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
+libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve
+this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
+changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this
+will lead to faster development of free libraries.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
+``work based on the library'' and a ``work that uses the library''. The
+former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
+works together with the library.
+
+ Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
+General Public License rather than by this special one.
+
+@iftex
+@unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end ifinfo
+
+@enumerate 0
+@item
+This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+General Public License (also called ``this License''). Each licensee is
+addressed as ``you''.
+
+ A ``library'' means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The ``Library'', below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms. A ``work based on the
+Library'' means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term ``modification''.)
+
+ ``Source code'' for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+@item
+You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+@item
+You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+@item
+You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+@item
+You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+@item
+If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+in the event an application does not supply such function or
+table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+root function must still compute square roots.)
+@end enumerate
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+@item
+You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+@item
+You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+@item
+A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a ``work that uses the Library''. Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a ``work that uses the
+library''. The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a ``work that uses the Library'' uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+@item
+As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+link a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+with the Library, with the complete machine-readable ``work that
+uses the Library'', as object code and/or source code, so that the
+user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
+that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+to use the modified definitions.)
+
+@item
+Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+least three years, to give the same user the materials
+specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+@item
+If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+specified materials from the same place.
+
+@item
+Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+@end enumerate
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the ``work that uses the
+Library'' must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+@item
+You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+Sections above.
+
+@item
+Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+@end enumerate
+
+@item
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+@item
+You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+@item
+Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+@item
+If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+@item
+If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+@item
+The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@item
+If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+@iftex
+@heading NO WARRANTY
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center NO WARRANTY
+@end ifinfo
+
+@item
+BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+@item
+IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+@end enumerate
+
+@iftex
+@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end ifinfo
+
+@page
+@unnumberedsec How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+ If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+ To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+@smallexample
+@var{one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.}
+Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{name of author}
+
+This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+Library General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+License along with this library; if not, write to the
+Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Cambridge,
+MA 02139, USA.
+@end smallexample
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the library, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+@example
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
+the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written
+by James Random Hacker.
+
+@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1990
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+@end example
+
+That's all there is to it!
--- /dev/null
+#!/bin/sh
+# Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it.
+# Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, June 1995
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# Prevent date giving response in another language.
+LANG=C
+export LANG
+LC_ALL=C
+export LC_ALL
+LC_TIME=C
+export LC_TIME
+
+# Get the extended ls output of the file or directory.
+# On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below.
+if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
+ set - x`ls -L -l -d $1`
+else
+ set - x`ls -l -d $1`
+fi
+# The month is at least the fourth argument
+# (3 shifts here, the next inside the loop).
+shift
+shift
+shift
+
+# Find the month. Next argument is day, followed by the year or time.
+month=
+until test $month
+do
+ shift
+ case $1 in
+ Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
+ Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
+ Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
+ Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
+ May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
+ Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
+ Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
+ Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
+ Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
+ Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
+ Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
+ Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
+ esac
+done
+
+day=$2
+
+# Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either
+# the time of day or the year.
+case $3 in
+ *:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$#
+ case $2 in
+ Jan) nummonthtod=1;;
+ Feb) nummonthtod=2;;
+ Mar) nummonthtod=3;;
+ Apr) nummonthtod=4;;
+ May) nummonthtod=5;;
+ Jun) nummonthtod=6;;
+ Jul) nummonthtod=7;;
+ Aug) nummonthtod=8;;
+ Sep) nummonthtod=9;;
+ Oct) nummonthtod=10;;
+ Nov) nummonthtod=11;;
+ Dec) nummonthtod=12;;
+ esac
+ # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also
+ # be used for files modified in the last year.
+ if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null;
+ then
+ year=`expr $year - 1`
+ fi;;
+ *) year=$3;;
+esac
+
+# The result.
+echo $day $month $year
--- /dev/null
+/* -*-c-*-
+ *
+ * $Id: mdwopt.c,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+ *
+ * Options parsing, similar to GNU @getopt_long@
+ *
+ * (c) 1996 Mark Wooding
+ */
+
+/*----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * This file is part of many programs.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
+ * published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
+ * License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ * GNU Library General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+ * License along with `mdwopt'; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+ */
+
+/*----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * $Log: mdwopt.c,v $
+ * Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ * --- Previous lives ---
+ *
+ * %Log: mdwopt.c,v %
+ * Revision 1.7 1997/09/11 09:19:11 mdw
+ * (mo__nextWord): Arrrgh. Don't free the environment variable buffer!
+ * People are still using it!
+ *
+ * Revision 1.6 1997/09/11 09:05:54 mdw
+ * (mo__nextWord): Fix bug which returns too many words from environment
+ * variables.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.5 1997/08/09 20:27:59 mdw
+ * Fix spelling of `Licensing'.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.4 1997/07/29 21:11:35 mdw
+ * Reformatted. Fixed buffer overflow when dealing with environment
+ * variables. Included NT in list of daft operating systems with `\' as a
+ * path separator. Fixed address of the FSF.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.3 1997/02/26 00:41:10 mdw
+ * Added GPL notice to the top. Slight formatting changes.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.2 1996/10/28 13:12:13 mdw
+ * Fixed calls to ctype.h routines. Arguments are cast to unsigned char
+ * to avoid invoking undefined behaviour caused by signedness of chars.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.1 1996/09/24 18:01:28 mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ */
+
+/*----- External dependencies ---------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "mdwopt.h"
+
+/*----- Configuration things ----------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if defined(__riscos)
+# define PATHSEP '.'
+#elif defined(__OS2__) || defined(__MSDOS__) || defined(__WINNT__)
+# define PATHSEP '\\'
+#else /* Assume a sane filing system */
+# define PATHSEP '/'
+#endif
+
+/*----- Global variables --------------------------------------------------*/
+
+mdwopt_data mdwopt_global = {0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0};
+
+enum {
+ ord__permute = 0, /* Permute the options (default) */
+ ord__return = 1, /* Return non-option things */
+ ord__posix = 2, /* Do POSIX-type hacking */
+ ord__negate = 4 /* Magic negate-next-thing flag */
+};
+
+/*----- Main code ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* --- @mo__nextWord@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments: @int argc@ = number of command line options
+ * @char *argv[]@ = pointer to command line options
+ * @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistent state
+ *
+ * Returns: Pointer to the next word to handle, or 0
+ *
+ * Use: Extracts the next word from the command line or environment
+ * variable.
+ */
+
+static char *mo__nextWord(int argc, char *const *argv, mdwopt_data *data)
+{
+ if (data->ind == -1) {
+ char *p = data->env;
+ char *q;
+ while (isspace((unsigned char)*p))
+ p++;
+ q = p;
+ while (*p && !isspace((unsigned char)*p))
+ p++;
+ data->env = p;
+ if (*p)
+ *p++ = 0;
+ if (p != q)
+ return (q);
+ data->env = 0;
+ data->ind = 1;
+ }
+
+ if (data->next == argc)
+ return (0);
+ return (argv[data->next++]);
+}
+
+/* --- @mo__permute@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments: @char *argv[]@ = pointer to command line arguments
+ * @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistent data
+ *
+ * Returns: --
+ *
+ * Use: Moves a command line option into the right place.
+ */
+
+static void mo__permute(char *const *argv, mdwopt_data *data)
+{
+ char **v = (char **)argv;
+ if (data->ind != -1) {
+ int i = data->next - 1;
+ char *p = v[i];
+ while (i > data->ind) {
+ v[i] = v[i - 1];
+ i--;
+ }
+ v[i] = p;
+ data->ind++;
+ }
+}
+
+/* --- @mo__findOpt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments: @int o@ = which option to search for
+ * @const char *shortopt@ = short options string to search
+ * @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistant state
+ *
+ * Returns: Pointer to rest of short options string (including magic
+ * characters)
+ *
+ * Use: Looks up a short option in the given string.
+ */
+
+static const char *mo__findOpt(int o, const char *shortopt,
+ mdwopt_data *data)
+{
+ const char *p = shortopt; /* Point to short opts table */
+ for (;;) {
+ if (!*p) /* No more options left */
+ return (0);
+
+ if (o != *p || (p[1] != '+' && data->order & ord__negate)) {
+ p++; /* Skip this option entry */
+ while (*p == '+') /* Jump a `%|+|%' sign */
+ p++;
+ while (*p == ':') /* And jump any `%|:|%' characters */
+ p++; /* Just in case there are any */
+ }
+ else
+ return (p + 1);
+ }
+}
+
+/* --- @mdwopt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments: @int argc@ = number of command line arguments
+ * @char * const *argv@ = pointer to command line arguments
+ * @const char *shortopt@ = pointer to short options information
+ * @const struct option *longopts@ = pointer to long opts info
+ * @int *longind@ = where to store matched longopt
+ * @mdwopt_data *data@ = persistent state for the parser
+ * @int flags@ = various useful flags
+ *
+ * Returns: Value of option found next, or an error character, or
+ * @EOF@ for the last thing.
+ *
+ * Use: Reads options. The routine should be more-or-less compatible
+ * with standard getopts, although it provides many more
+ * features even than the standard GNU implementation.
+ *
+ * The precise manner of options parsing is determined by
+ * various flag settings, which are described below. By setting
+ * flag values appropriately, you can achieve behaviour very
+ * similar to most other getopt routines.
+ *
+ *
+ * How options parsing appears to users
+ *
+ * A command line consists of a number of `words' (which may
+ * contain spaces, according to various shell quoting
+ * conventions). A word may be an option, an argument to an
+ * option, or a non-option. An option begins with a special
+ * character, usually `%|-|%', although `%|+|%' is also used
+ * sometimes. As special exceptions, the word containing only a
+ * `%|-|%' is considered to be a non-option, since it usually
+ * represents standard input or output as a filename, and the
+ * word containing a double-dash `%|--|%' is used to mark all
+ * following words as being non-options regardless of their
+ * initial character.
+ *
+ * Traditionally, all words after the first non-option have been
+ * considered to be non-options automatically, so that options
+ * must be specified before filenames. However, this
+ * implementation can extract all the options from the command
+ * line regardless of their position. This can usually be
+ * disabled by setting one of the environment variables
+ * `%|POSIXLY_CORRECT|%' or `%|_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER|%'.
+ *
+ * There are two different styles of options: `short' and
+ * `long'.
+ *
+ * Short options are the sort which Unix has known for ages: an
+ * option is a single letter, preceded by a `%|-|%'. Short
+ * options can be joined together to save space (and possibly to
+ * make silly words): e.g., instead of giving options
+ * `%|-x -y|%', a user could write `%|-xy|%'. Some short
+ * options can have arguments, which appear after the option
+ * letter, either immediately following, or in the next `word'
+ * (so an option with an argument could be written as
+ * `%|-o foo|%' or as `%|-ofoo|%'). Note that options with
+ * optional arguments must be written in the second style.
+ *
+ * When a short option controls a flag setting, it is sometimes
+ * possible to explicitly turn the flag off, as well as turning
+ * it on, (usually to override default options). This is
+ * usually done by using a `%|+|%' instead of a `%|-|%' to
+ * introduce the option.
+ *
+ * Long options, as popularised by the GNU utilities, are given
+ * long-ish memorable names, preceded by a double-dash `%|--|%'.
+ * Since their names are more than a single character, long
+ * options can't be combined in the same way as short options.
+ * Arguments to long options may be given either in the same
+ * `word', separated from the option name by an equals sign, or
+ * in the following `word'.
+ *
+ * Long option names can be abbreviated if necessary, as long
+ * as the abbreviation is unique. This means that options can
+ * have sensible and memorable names but still not require much
+ * typing from an experienced user.
+ *
+ * Like short options, long options can control flag settings.
+ * The options to manipulate these settings come in pairs: an
+ * option of the form `%|--set-flag|%' might set the flag, while
+ * an option of the form `%|--no-set-flag|%' might clear it.
+ *
+ * It is usual for applications to provide both short and long
+ * options with identical behaviour. Some applications with
+ * lots of options may only provide long options (although they
+ * will often be only two or three characters long). In this
+ * case, long options can be preceded with a single `%|-|%'
+ * character, and negated by a `%|+|%' character.
+ *
+ * Finally, some (older) programs accept arguments of the form
+ * `%%@.{"-"<number>}%%', to set some numerical parameter,
+ * typically a line count of some kind.
+ *
+ *
+ * How programs parse options
+ *
+ * An application parses its options by calling mdwopt
+ * repeatedly. Each time it is called, mdwopt returns a value
+ * describing the option just read, and stores information about
+ * the option in a data block. The value %$-1$% is returned
+ * when there are no more options to be read. The `%|?|%'
+ * character is returned when an error is encountered.
+ *
+ * Before starting to parse options, the value @data->ind@ must
+ * be set to 0 or 1. The value of @data->err@ can also be set,
+ * to choose whether errors are reported by mdwopt.
+ *
+ * The program's `@argc@' and `@argv@' arguments are passed to
+ * the options parser, so that it can read the command line. A
+ * flags word is also passed, allowing the program fine control
+ * over parsing. The flags are described above.
+ *
+ * Short options are described by a string, which once upon a
+ * time just contained the permitted option characters. Now the
+ * options string begins with a collection of flag characters,
+ * and various flag characters can be put after options
+ * characters to change their properties.
+ *
+ * If the first character of the short options string is
+ * `%|+|%', `%|-|%' or `%|!|%', the order in which options are
+ * read is modified, as follows:
+ *
+ * `%|+|%' forces the POSIX order to be used. As soon as a non-
+ * option is found, mdwopt returns %$-1$%.
+ *
+ * `%|-|%' makes mdwopt treat non-options as being `special'
+ * sorts of option. When a non-option word is found, the
+ * value 0 is returned, and the actual text of the word
+ * is stored as being the option's argument.
+ *
+ * `%|!|%' forces the default order to be used. The entire
+ * command line is scanned for options, which are
+ * returned in order. However, during this process,
+ * the options are moved in the @argv@ array, so that
+ * they appear before the non- options.
+ *
+ * A `%|:|%' character may be placed after the ordering flag (or
+ * at the very beginning if no ordering flag is given) which
+ * indicates that the character `%|:|%', rather than `%|?|%',
+ * should be returned if a missing argument error is detected.
+ *
+ * Each option in the string can be followed by a `%|+|%' sign,
+ * indicating that it can be negated, a `%|:|%' sign indicating
+ * that it requires an argument, or a `%|::|%' string,
+ * indicating an optional argument. Both `%|+|%' and `%|:|%' or
+ * `%|::|%' may be given, although the `%|+|%' must come first.
+ *
+ * If an option is found, the option character is returned to
+ * the caller. A pointer to an argument is stored in
+ * @data->arg@, or @NULL@ is stored if there was no argument.
+ * If a negated option was found, the option character is
+ * returned ORred with @gFlag_negated@ (bit 8 set).
+ *
+ * Long options are described in a table. Each entry in the
+ * table is of type @struct option@, and the table is terminated
+ * by an entry whose @name@ field is null. Each option has
+ * a flags word which, due to historical reasons, is called
+ * @has_arg@. This describes various properties of the option,
+ * such as what sort of argument it takes, and whether it can
+ * be negated.
+ *
+ * When mdwopt finds a long option, it looks the name up in the
+ * table. The index of the matching entry is stored in the
+ * @longind@ variable, passed to mdwopt (unless @longind@ is 0):
+ * a value of %$-1$% indicates that no long option was
+ * found. The behaviour is then dependent on the values in the
+ * table entry. If @flag@ is nonzero, it points to an integer
+ * to be modified by mdwopt. Usually the value in the @val@
+ * field is simply stored in the @flag@ variable. If the flag
+ * @gFlag_switch@ is set, however, the value is combined with
+ * the existing value of the flags using a bitwise OR. If
+ * @gFlag_negate@ is set, then the flag bit will be cleared if a
+ * matching negated long option is found. The value 0 is
+ * returned.
+ *
+ * If @flag@ is zero, the value in @val@ is returned by mdwopt,
+ * possibly with bit 8 set if the option was negated.
+ *
+ * Arguments for long options are stored in @data->arg@, as
+ * before.
+ *
+ * Numeric options, if enabled, cause the value `%|#|%' to be
+ * returned, and the numeric value to be stored in @data->opt@.
+ *
+ * If the flag @gFlag_envVar@ is set on entry, options will be
+ * extracted from an environment variable whose name is built by
+ * capitalising all the letters of the program's name. (This
+ * allows a user to have different default settings for a
+ * program, by calling it through different symbolic links.) */
+
+int mdwopt(int argc, char *const *argv,
+ const char *shortopt,
+ const struct option *longopts, int *longind,
+ mdwopt_data *data, int flags)
+{
+ /* --- Local variables --- */
+
+ char *p, *q, *r; /* Some useful things to have */
+ char *prefix; /* Prefix from this option */
+ int i; /* Always useful */
+ char noarg = '?'; /* Standard missing-arg char */
+
+ /* --- Sort out our data --- */
+
+ if (!data) /* If default data requested */
+ data = &mdwopt_global; /* Then use the global stuff */
+
+ /* --- See if this is the first time --- */
+
+ if (data->ind == 0 || (data->ind == 1 && ~flags & gFlag_noProgName)) {
+
+ /* --- Sort out default returning order --- */
+
+ if (getenv("_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER") || /* Examine environment for opts */
+ getenv("POSIXLY_CORRECT")) /* To see if we disable features */
+ data->order = ord__posix; /* If set, use POSIX ordering */
+ else
+ data->order = ord__permute; /* Otherwise mangle the options */
+
+ /* --- Now see what the caller actually wants --- */
+
+ switch (shortopt[0]) { /* Look at the first character */
+ case '-': /* `%|-|%' turns on in-orderness */
+ data->order = ord__return;
+ break;
+ case '+': /* `%|+|%' turns on POSIXness */
+ data->order = ord__posix;
+ break;
+ case '!': /* `%|!|%' ignores POSIXness */
+ data->order = ord__permute;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* --- Now decide on the program's name --- */
+
+ if (~flags & gFlag_noProgName) {
+ p = q = (char *)argv[0];
+ while (*p) {
+ if (*p++ == PATHSEP)
+ q = p;
+ }
+ data->prog = q;
+
+ data->ind = data->next = 1;
+ data->list = 0;
+
+ /* --- See about environment variables --- *
+ *
+ * Be careful. The program may be setuid, and an attacker might have
+ * given us a long name in @argv[0]@. If the name is very long, don't
+ * support this option.
+ */
+
+ if (flags & gFlag_envVar && strlen(data->prog) < 48) {
+
+ char buf[64];
+
+ /* --- For RISC OS, support a different format --- *
+ *
+ * Acorn's RISC OS tends to put settings in variables named
+ * `App$Options' rather than `APP'. Under RISC OS, I'll support
+ * both methods, just to avoid confuddlement.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __riscos
+ sprintf(buf, "%s$Options", data->prog);
+ p = getenv(buf);
+ if (!p) {
+#endif
+
+ p = buf; /* Point to a buffer */
+ q = data->prog; /* Point to program name */
+ while (*q) /* While characters left here */
+ *p++ = toupper(*q++); /* Copy and uppercase */
+ *p++ = 0; /* Terminate my copy of this */
+ p = getenv(buf); /* Get the value of the variable */
+
+#ifdef __riscos
+ }
+#endif
+
+ /* --- Copy the options string into a buffer --- */
+
+ if (p) { /* If it is defined */
+ q = malloc(strlen(p) + 1); /* Allocate space for a copy */
+ if (!q) { /* If that failed */
+ fprintf(stderr, /* Report a nice error */
+ "%s: Not enough memory to read settings in "
+ "environment variable\n",
+ data->prog);
+ } else { /* Otherwise */
+ strcpy(q, p); /* Copy the text over */
+ data->ind = -1; /* Mark that we're parsing envvar */
+ data->env = data->estart = q; /* And store the pointer away */
+ }
+ }
+
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ data->ind = data->next = 0;
+ }
+
+ /* --- Do some initial bodgery --- *
+ *
+ * The @shortopt@ string can have some interesting characters at the
+ * beginning. We'll skip past them.
+ */
+
+ switch (shortopt[0]) {
+ case '+':
+ case '-':
+ case '!':
+ shortopt++;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (shortopt[0] == ':') {
+ noarg = shortopt[0];
+ shortopt++;
+ }
+
+ if (longind) /* Allow longind to be null */
+ *longind = -1; /* Clear this to avoid confusion */
+ data->opt = -1; /* And this too */
+ data->arg = 0; /* No option set up here */
+
+ /* --- Now go off and search for an option --- */
+
+ if (!data->list || !*data->list) {
+ data->order &= 3; /* Clear negation flag */
+
+ /* --- Now we need to find the next option --- *
+ *
+ * Exactly how we do this depends on the settings of the order variable.
+ * We identify options as being things starting with `%|-|%', and which
+ * aren't equal to `%|-|%' or `%|--|%'. We'll look for options until:
+ *
+ * * We find something which isn't an option AND @order == ord__posix@
+ * * We find a `%|--|%'
+ * * We reach the end of the list
+ *
+ * There are some added little wrinkles, which we'll meet as we go.
+ */
+
+ for (;;) { /* Keep looping for a while */
+ p = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data); /* Get the next word out */
+ if (!p) /* If there's no next word */
+ return (EOF); /* There's no more now */
+
+ /* --- See if we've found an option --- */
+
+ if ((p[0] == '-' || (p[0] == '+' && flags & gFlag_negation)) &&
+ p[1] != 0) {
+ if (strcmp(p, "--") == 0) { /* If this is the magic marker */
+ mo__permute(argv, data); /* Stow the magic marker item */
+ return (EOF); /* There's nothing else to do */
+ }
+ break; /* We've found something! */
+ }
+
+ /* --- Figure out how to proceed --- */
+
+ switch (data->order & 3) {
+ case ord__posix: /* POSIX option order */
+ return (EOF); /* This is easy */
+ break;
+ case ord__permute: /* Permute the option order */
+ break;
+ case ord__return: /* Return each argument */
+ mo__permute(argv, data); /* Insert word in same place */
+ data->arg = p; /* Point to the argument */
+ return (0); /* Return the value */
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* --- We found an option --- */
+
+ mo__permute(argv, data); /* Do any permuting necessary */
+
+ /* --- Check for a numeric option --- *
+ *
+ * We only check the first character (or the second if the first is a
+ * sign). This ought to be enough.
+ */
+
+ if (flags & gFlag_numbers && (p[0] == '-' || flags & gFlag_negNumber)) {
+ if (((p[1] == '+' || p[1] == '-') && isdigit((unsigned char)p[2])) ||
+ isdigit((unsigned char)p[1])) {
+ data->opt = strtol(p + 1, &data->arg, 10);
+ while (isspace((unsigned char)data->arg[0]))
+ data->arg++;
+ if (!data->arg[0])
+ data->arg = 0;
+ return (p[0] == '-' ? '#' : '#' | gFlag_negated);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* --- Check for a long option --- */
+
+ if (p[0] == '+')
+ data->order |= ord__negate;
+
+ if (((p[0] == '-' && p[1] == '-') ||
+ (flags & gFlag_noShorts && !mo__findOpt(p[1], shortopt, data))) &&
+ (~flags & gFlag_noLongs)) /* Is this a long option? */
+ {
+ int match = -1; /* Count matches as we go */
+
+ if (p[0] == '+') { /* If it's negated */
+ data->order |= ord__negate; /* Set the negate flag */
+ p++; /* Point to the main text */
+ prefix = "+"; /* Set the prefix string up */
+ } else if (p[1] == '-') { /* If this is a `%|--|%' option */
+ if ((flags & gFlag_negation) && strncmp(p + 2, "no-", 3) == 0) {
+ p += 5; /* Point to main text */
+ prefix = "--no-"; /* And set the prefix */
+ data->order |= ord__negate; /* Set the negatedness flag */
+ } else {
+ p += 2; /* Point to the main text */
+ prefix = "--"; /* Remember the prefix string */
+ }
+ } else {
+ if ((flags & gFlag_negation) && strncmp(p + 1, "no-", 3) == 0) {
+ p += 4; /* Find the text */
+ prefix = "-no-"; /* Set the prefix */
+ data->order |= ord__negate; /* Set negatedness flag */
+ } else {
+ p++; /* Otherwise find the text */
+ prefix = "-"; /* And remember the prefix */
+ }
+ }
+
+ for (i = 0; longopts[i].name; i++) { /* Loop through the options */
+ if ((data->order & ord__negate) &&
+ (~longopts[i].has_arg & gFlag_negate))
+ continue; /* If neg and opt doesn't allow */
+
+ r = (char *) longopts[i].name; /* Point to the name string */
+ q = p; /* Point to the string start */
+ for (;;) { /* Do a loop here */
+ if (*q == 0 || *q == '=') { /* End of the option string? */
+ if (*r == 0) { /* If end of other string */
+ match = i; /* This is the match */
+ goto botched; /* And exit the loop now */
+ }
+ if (match == -1) { /* If no match currently */
+ match = i; /* Then this is it, here */
+ break; /* Stop looking now */
+ } else {
+ match = -1; /* Else it's ambiguous */
+ goto botched; /* So give up right now */
+ }
+ }
+ else if (*q != *r) /* Otherwise if mismatch */
+ break; /* Abort this loop */
+ q++, r++; /* Increment the counters */
+ }
+ }
+
+ botched:
+ if (match == -1) { /* If we couldn't find a match */
+ if (data->err) {
+ fprintf(stderr, "%s: unrecognised option `%s%s'\n",
+ data->prog,
+ prefix, p);
+ }
+ return ('?');
+ }
+
+ if (longind) /* Allow longind to be null */
+ *longind = match; /* Store the match away */
+
+ /* --- Handle argument behaviour --- */
+
+ while (*p != 0 && *p != '=') /* Find the argument string */
+ p++;
+ p = (*p ? p + 1 : 0); /* Sort out argument presence */
+ q = (char *) longopts[match].name; /* Remember the name here */
+
+ switch (longopts[match].has_arg & 3) {
+ case no_argument:
+ if (p) {
+ if (data->err) {
+ fprintf(stderr,
+ "%s: option `%s%s' does not accept arguments\n",
+ data->prog,
+ prefix, q);
+ }
+ return ('?');
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case required_argument:
+ if (!p) { /* If no argument given */
+ p = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data);
+
+ if (!p) { /* If no more arguments */
+ if (data->err) {
+ fprintf(stderr, "%s: option `%s%s' requires an argument\n",
+ data->prog,
+ prefix, q);
+ }
+ return (noarg);
+ }
+
+ mo__permute(argv, data);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case optional_argument:
+ /* Who cares? */
+ break;
+ }
+ data->arg = p;
+
+ /* --- Do correct things now we have a match --- */
+
+ if (longopts[match].flag) { /* If he has a @flag@ argument */
+ if (longopts[match].has_arg & gFlag_switch) {
+ if (data->order & ord__negate)
+ *longopts[match].flag &= ~longopts[match].val;
+ else
+ *longopts[match].flag |= longopts[match].val;
+ } else {
+ if (data->order & ord__negate)
+ *longopts[match].flag = 0;
+ else
+ *longopts[match].flag = longopts[match].val;
+ }
+ return (0); /* And return something */
+ } else {
+ if (data->order & ord__negate)
+ return (longopts[match].val | gFlag_negated);
+ else
+ return (longopts[match].val);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* --- Do short options things --- */
+
+ else {
+ if (p[0] == '+') /* If starts with a `%|+|%' */
+ data->order |= ord__negate;
+ data->list = p + 1; /* Omit leading `%|-|%'/`%|+|%' */
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* --- Now process the short options --- */
+
+ i = *data->list++; /* Get the next option letter */
+ data->opt = i; /* Store this away nicely */
+
+ p = (char *) mo__findOpt(i, shortopt, data);
+ if (!p) { /* No more options left */
+ if (data->err) {
+ fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown option `%c%c'\n",
+ data->prog,
+ data->order & ord__negate ? '+' : '-',
+ i);
+ }
+ return ('?');
+ }
+
+ data->opt = i; /* Store this for the caller */
+
+ /* --- Sort out an argument, if we expect one --- */
+
+ if (p[0] == ':') { /* If we expect an option */
+ q = (data->list[0] ? data->list : 0); /* If argument expected, use it */
+ data->list = 0; /* Kill the remaining options */
+ if (p[1] != ':' && !q) { /* If no arg, and not optional */
+
+ /* --- Same code as before --- */
+
+ q = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data); /* Read the next word */
+ if (!q) { /* If no more arguments */
+ if (data->err) {
+ fprintf(stderr, "%s: option `%c%c' requires an argument\n",
+ data->prog,
+ data->order & ord__negate ? '+' : '-',
+ i);
+ }
+ return (noarg);
+ }
+ mo__permute(argv, data);
+ }
+
+ data->arg = q;
+ }
+ return ((data->order & ord__negate) ? i | gFlag_negated : i);
+}
+
+/*----- That's all, folks -------------------------------------------------*/
--- /dev/null
+/* -*-c-*-
+ *
+ * $Id: mdwopt.h,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+ *
+ * Options parsing, similar to GNU @getopt_long@
+ *
+ * (c) 1996 Mark Wooding
+ */
+
+/*----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * This file is part of many programs.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
+ * published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
+ * License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ * GNU Library General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+ * License along with `mdwopt'; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+ */
+
+/*----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * $Log: mdwopt.h,v $
+ * Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ * --- Previous lives ---
+ *
+ * %Log: mdwopt.h,v %
+ * Revision 1.5 1997/08/09 20:27:59 mdw
+ * Fix spelling of `Licensing'.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.4 1997/07/29 21:11:49 mdw
+ * Fixed address of the FSF.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.3 1996/12/31 19:41:33 mdw
+ * Formatting changes.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.2 1996/11/23 00:47:25 mdw
+ * Added `MdwOpt' object from the `anagram' source code.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.1 1996/09/24 18:01:43 mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef MDWOPT_H
+#define MDWOPT_H
+
+/*----- Options handling structures ---------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+ extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+/* --- @mdwopt_data@ --- *
+ *
+ * Contains all the information needed by the @mdwopt@ routine to do its
+ * work.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+ /* --- Public variables --- */
+
+ char *arg; /* Arg of current option, or 0 */
+ int opt; /* Value of current option */
+ int ind; /* 0 for init, index when done */
+ int err; /* Set nonzero for error messages */
+ char *prog; /* Program name (from @argv[0]@) */
+
+ /* --- Private variables --- *
+ *
+ * Don't play with these, please.
+ */
+
+ char *list; /* Current short options pointer */
+ int next; /* Next argument, unpermuted */
+ int order; /* Ordering of options, flags */
+ char *env; /* Where we are in the env var */
+ char *estart; /* Pointer to env var buffer */
+}
+mdwopt_data;
+
+/*----- Global variables --------------------------------------------------*/
+
+extern mdwopt_data mdwopt_global; /* The default global data */
+
+/* --- For compatibility with older programs (and prettiness) --- *
+ *
+ * The macros here access the global structure defined above. I consider it
+ * to be perfectly acceptable to use these macros in new code, because it
+ * looks nicer than playing with @mdwopt_global@.
+ */
+
+#define optarg (mdwopt_global.arg) /* Argument of current option */
+#define optopt (mdwopt_global.opt) /* Code of current option */
+#define opterr (mdwopt_global.err) /* Zero to report error messages */
+#define optind (mdwopt_global.ind) /* Index of first non-option */
+#define optprog (mdwopt_global.prog) /* Pointer to program name */
+
+/*----- Type definitions --------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* --- Long options definition table --- */
+
+struct option {
+ const char *name; /* Name of the long option */
+ int has_arg; /* Does it have an argument? */
+ int *flag; /* Address of flag variable */
+ int val; /* Value to store/return */
+};
+
+/* --- Old-style names for argument flags in long options table --- */
+
+enum {
+ no_argument, /* No argument required */
+ required_argument, /* User must specify argument */
+ optional_argument /* Argument is optional */
+};
+
+/* --- New style flag names --- */
+
+enum {
+ gFlag_argReq = 1, /* Required argument */
+ gFlag_argOpt = 2, /* Optional argument */
+ gFlag_switch = 4, /* OR val into flag, don't store */
+ gFlag_negate = 8, /* Allow long option to be negated */
+ gFlag__last_long_opt_flag = 0 /* Dummy value */
+};
+
+enum {
+ gFlag_noLongs = 1, /* Don't read long options */
+ gFlag_noShorts = 2, /* Don't read short options */
+ gFlag_numbers = 4, /* Read numeric options */
+ gFlag_negation = 8, /* Allow `%|+|%' for negations */
+ gFlag_envVar = 16, /* Parse options from env var */
+ gFlag_noProgName = 32, /* Don't set @optprog@ */
+ gFlag_negNumber = 64, /* Allow negated number options */
+ gFlag__last_mdwopt_flag = 0 /* Dummy value */
+};
+
+enum {
+ gFlag_negated = 256, /* Option flag was negated by user */
+ gFlag__last_return_flag = 0 /* Dummy value */
+};
+
+/*----- Main code ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* --- @mdwopt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments: @int argc@ = number of command line arguments
+ * @char * const *argv@ = pointer to command line arguments
+ * @const char *shortopt@ = pointer to short options information
+ * @const struct option *longopts@ = pointer to long opts info
+ * @int *longind@ = where to store matched longopt
+ * @mdwopt_data *data@ = persistent state for the parser
+ * @int flags@ = various useful flags
+ *
+ * Returns: Value of option found next, or an error character, or
+ * @EOF@ for the last thing.
+ *
+ * Use: Reads options. The routine should be more-or-less compatible
+ * with standard getopts, although it provides many more
+ * features even than the standard GNU implementation.
+ *
+ * The precise manner of options parsing is determined by
+ * various flag settings, which are described below. By setting
+ * flag values appropriately, you can achieve behaviour very
+ * similar to most other getopt routines.
+ *
+ *
+ * How options parsing appears to users
+ *
+ * A command line consists of a number of `words' (which may
+ * contain spaces, according to various shell quoting
+ * conventions). A word may be an option, an argument to an
+ * option, or a non-option. An option begins with a special
+ * character, usually `%|-|%', although `%|+|%' is also used
+ * sometimes. As special exceptions, the word containing only a
+ * `%|-|%' is considered to be a non-option, since it usually
+ * represents standard input or output as a filename, and the
+ * word containing a double-dash `%|--|%' is used to mark all
+ * following words as being non-options regardless of their
+ * initial character.
+ *
+ * Traditionally, all words after the first non-option have been
+ * considered to be non-options automatically, so that options
+ * must be specified before filenames. However, this
+ * implementation can extract all the options from the command
+ * line regardless of their position. This can usually be
+ * disabled by setting one of the environment variables
+ * `%|POSIXLY_CORRECT|%' or `%|_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER|%'.
+ *
+ * There are two different styles of options: `short' and
+ * `long'.
+ *
+ * Short options are the sort which Unix has known for ages: an
+ * option is a single letter, preceded by a `%|-|%'. Short
+ * options can be joined together to save space (and possibly to
+ * make silly words): e.g., instead of giving options
+ * `%|-x.-y|%', a user could write `%|-xy|%'. Some short
+ * options can have arguments, which appear after the option
+ * letter, either immediately following, or in the next `word'
+ * (so an option with an argument could be written as
+ * `%|-o foo|%' or as `%|-ofoo|%'). Note that options with
+ * optional arguments must be written in the second style.
+ *
+ * When a short option controls a flag setting, it is sometimes
+ * possible to explicitly turn the flag off, as well as turning
+ * it on, (usually to override default options). This is
+ * usually done by using a `%|+|%' instead of a `%|-|%' to
+ * introduce the option.
+ *
+ * Long options, as popularised by the GNU utilities, are given
+ * long-ish memorable names, preceded by a double-dash `%|--|%'.
+ * Since their names are more than a single character, long
+ * options can't be combined in the same way as short options.
+ * Arguments to long options may be given either in the same
+ * `word', separated from the option name by an equals sign, or
+ * in the following `word'.
+ *
+ * Long option names can be abbreviated if necessary, as long
+ * as the abbreviation is unique. This means that options can
+ * have sensible and memorable names but still not require much
+ * typing from an experienced user.
+ *
+ * Like short options, long options can control flag settings.
+ * The options to manipulate these settings come in pairs: an
+ * option of the form `%|--set-flag|%' might set the flag, while
+ * an option of the form `%|--no-set-flag|%' might clear it.
+ *
+ * It is usual for applications to provide both short and long
+ * options with identical behaviour. Some applications with
+ * lots of options may only provide long options (although they
+ * will often be only two or three characters long). In this
+ * case, long options can be preceded with a single `%|-|%'
+ * character, and negated by a `%|+|%' character.
+ *
+ * Finally, some (older) programs accept arguments of the form
+ * `%%@.{"-"<number>}%%', to set some numerical parameter,
+ * typically a line count of some kind.
+ *
+ *
+ * How programs parse options
+ *
+ * An application parses its options by calling mdwopt
+ * repeatedly. Each time it is called, mdwopt returns a value
+ * describing the option just read, and stores information about
+ * the option in a data block. The value %$-1$% is returned
+ * when there are no more options to be read. The `%|?|%'
+ * character is returned when an error is encountered.
+ *
+ * Before starting to parse options, the value @data->ind@ must
+ * be set to 0 or 1. The value of @data->err@ can also be set,
+ * to choose whether errors are reported by mdwopt.
+ *
+ * The program's `@argc@' and `@argv@' arguments are passed to
+ * the options parser, so that it can read the command line. A
+ * flags word is also passed, allowing the program fine control
+ * over parsing. The flags are described above.
+ *
+ * Short options are described by a string, which once upon a
+ * time just contained the permitted option characters. Now the
+ * options string begins with a collection of flag characters,
+ * and various flag characters can be put after options
+ * characters to change their properties.
+ *
+ * If the first character of the short options string is
+ * `%|+|%', `%|-|%' or `%|!|%', the order in which options are
+ * read is modified, as follows:
+ *
+ * `%|+|%' forces the POSIX order to be used. As soon as a non-
+ * option is found, mdwopt returns %$-1$%.
+ *
+ * `%|-|%' makes mdwopt treat non-options as being `special'
+ * sorts of option. When a non-option word is found, the
+ * value 0 is returned, and the actual text of the word
+ * is stored as being the option's argument.
+ *
+ * `%|!|%' forces the default order to be used. The entire
+ * command line is scanned for options, which are
+ * returned in order. However, during this process,
+ * the options are moved in the @argv@ array, so that
+ * they appear before the non- options.
+ *
+ * A `%|:|%' character may be placed after the ordering flag (or
+ * at the very beginning if no ordering flag is given) which
+ * indicates that the character `%|:|%', rather than `%|?|%',
+ * should be returned if a missing argument error is detected.
+ *
+ * Each option in the string can be followed by a `%|+|%' sign,
+ * indicating that it can be negated, a `%|:|%' sign indicating
+ * that it requires an argument, or a `%|::|%' string,
+ * indicating an optional argument. Both `%|+|%' and `%|:|%' or
+ * `%|::|%' may be given, although the `%|+|%' must come first.
+ *
+ * If an option is found, the option character is returned to
+ * the caller. A pointer to an argument is stored in
+ * @data->arg@, or @NULL@ is stored if there was no argument.
+ * If a negated option was found, the option character is
+ * returned ORred with @gFlag_negated@ (bit 8 set).
+ *
+ * Long options are described in a table. Each entry in the
+ * table is of type @struct option@, and the table is terminated
+ * by an entry whose @name@ field is null. Each option has
+ * a flags word which, due to historical reasons, is called
+ * @has_arg@. This describes various properties of the option,
+ * such as what sort of argument it takes, and whether it can
+ * be negated.
+ *
+ * When mdwopt finds a long option, it looks the name up in the
+ * table. The index of the matching entry is stored in the
+ * @longind@ variable, passed to mdwopt (unless @longind@ is 0):
+ * a value of %$-1$% indicates that no long option was
+ * found. The behaviour is then dependent on the values in the
+ * table entry. If @flag@ is nonzero, it points to an integer
+ * to be modified by mdwopt. Usually the value in the @val@
+ * field is simply stored in the @flag@ variable. If the flag
+ * @gFlag_switch@ is set, however, the value is combined with
+ * the existing value of the flags using a bitwise OR. If
+ * @gFlag_negate@ is set, then the flag bit will be cleared if a
+ * matching negated long option is found. The value 0 is
+ * returned.
+ *
+ * If @flag@ is zero, the value in @val@ is returned by mdwopt,
+ * possibly with bit 8 set if the option was negated.
+ *
+ * Arguments for long options are stored in @data->arg@, as
+ * before.
+ *
+ * Numeric options, if enabled, cause the value `%|#|%' to be
+ * returned, and the numeric value to be stored in @data->opt@.
+ *
+ * If the flag @gFlag_envVar@ is set on entry, options will be
+ * extracted from an environment variable whose name is built by
+ * capitalising all the letters of the program's name. (This
+ * allows a user to have different default settings for a
+ * program, by calling it through different symbolic links.) */
+
+extern int mdwopt(int /*argc*/, char *const */*argv*/,
+ const char */*shortopt*/,
+ const struct option */*longopts*/, int */*longind*/,
+ mdwopt_data */*data*/, int /*flags*/);
+
+/* --- Macros for more commonly used routines --- */
+
+#define getopt(c, v, o) mdwopt(c, v, o, 0, 0, 0, gFlag_noLongs)
+#define getopt_long(c, v, o, l, li) mdwopt(c, v, o, l, li, 0, 0)
+#define getopt_long_only(c, v, o, l, li) \
+ mdwopt(c, v, o, l, li, 0, gFlag_noShorts)
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+/*----- C++ wrapper class -------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+
+/* --- Class: @MdwOpt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Parent: ---
+ *
+ * Methods: @MdwOpt@ -- construct a new mdwopt object with the given
+ * arguments. These are remembered for later use.
+ * @arg@ -- return the argument of the current option
+ * arguments. These are remembered for later use.
+ * @arg@ -- return the argument of the current option
+ * @opt@ -- return the value of the current option
+ * @ind@ -- return the index of the next unread argument
+ * @longind@ -- return index of current long option in table
+ * @errors@ -- return or set whether we report errors to the
+ * user
+ * @prog@ -- return program name from @argv[0]@
+ * @next@ -- return next option read from the table
+ *
+ * Use: A simple C++ class for encapsulating the options parser.
+ * The methods are all nice and simple, and extremely similar
+ * to the normal C interface described above.
+ */
+
+class MdwOpt {
+ protected:
+ int argc;
+ char * const *argv;
+ const char *shortopts;
+ const struct option *longopts;
+ int long_ind;
+ int flags;
+
+ mdwopt_data data;
+
+ public:
+ MdwOpt(int c, char * const *v, const char *so,
+ const struct option *lo, int f=0) :
+ argc(c), argv(v), shortopts(so), longopts(lo), flags(f) {
+ data.ind = 0;
+ data.err = 1;
+ }
+
+ const char *arg(void) const { return (data.arg); }
+ int opt(void) const { return (data.opt); }
+ int errors(void) const { return (data.err); }
+ int errors(int e) { int oe = data.err; data.err = e; return (oe); }
+ int ind(void) const { return (data.ind); }
+ int longind(void) const { return (long_ind); }
+ const char *prog(void) const { return (data.prog); }
+
+ int next(void) {
+ return (mdwopt(argc, argv, shortopts,
+ longopts, &long_ind, &data, flags));
+ }
+};
+
+#endif
+
+/*----- That's all, folks -------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#endif
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+# Common stub for a few missing GNU programs while installing.
+# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Franc,ois Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>, 1996.
+
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
+# 02111-1307, USA.
+
+if test $# -eq 0; then
+ echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
+ exit 1
+fi
+
+case "$1" in
+
+ -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help)
+ echo "\
+$0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...
+
+Handle \`PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...' for when PROGRAM is missing, or return an
+error status if there is no known handling for PROGRAM.
+
+Options:
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -v, --version output version information and exit
+
+Supported PROGRAM values:
+ aclocal touch file \`aclocal.m4'
+ autoconf touch file \`configure'
+ autoheader touch file \`config.h.in'
+ automake touch all \`Makefile.in' files
+ bison touch file \`y.tab.c'
+ makeinfo touch the output file
+ yacc touch file \`y.tab.c'"
+ ;;
+
+ -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version)
+ echo "missing - GNU libit 0.0"
+ ;;
+
+ -*)
+ echo 1>&2 "$0: Unknown \`$1' option"
+ echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+
+ aclocal)
+ echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if
+ you modified \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'. You might want
+ to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from
+ any GNU archive site."
+ touch aclocal.m4
+ ;;
+
+ autoconf)
+ echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if
+ you modified \`configure.in'. You might want to install the
+ \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU
+ archive site."
+ touch configure
+ ;;
+
+ autoheader)
+ echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if
+ you modified \`acconfig.h' or \`configure.in'. You might want
+ to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them
+ from any GNU archive site."
+ touch config.h.in
+ ;;
+
+ automake)
+ echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if
+ you modified \`Makefile.am', \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'.
+ You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages.
+ Grab them from any GNU archive site."
+ find . -type f -name Makefile.am -print \
+ | sed 's/^\(.*\).am$/touch \1.in/' \
+ | sh
+ ;;
+
+ bison|yacc)
+ echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if
+ you modified a \`.y' file. You may need the \`Bison' package
+ in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get
+ \`Bison' from any GNU archive site."
+ touch y.tab.c
+ ;;
+
+ makeinfo)
+ echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if
+ you modified a \`.texi' or \`.texinfo' file, or any other file
+ indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual. The spurious
+ call might also be the consequence of using a buggy \`make' (AIX,
+ DU, IRIX). You might want to install the \`Texinfo' package or
+ the \`GNU make' package. Grab either from any GNU archive site."
+ file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'`
+ if test -z "$file"; then
+ file=`echo "$*" | sed 's/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/'`
+ file=`sed -n '/^@setfilename/ { s/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/; p; q; }' $file`
+ fi
+ touch $file
+ ;;
+
+ *)
+ echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and you do not seem to have it handy on your
+ system. You might have modified some files without having the
+ proper tools for further handling them. Check the \`README' file,
+ it often tells you about the needed prerequirements for installing
+ this package. You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in case
+ some other package would contain this missing \`$1' program."
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+esac
+
+exit 0
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: mkaclocal.in,v 1.2 1997/09/11 09:06:33 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Create an `aclocal.m4' file containing the right macros.
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log$
+
+# --- Configuration variables ---
+
+prefix=@prefix@
+exec_prefix=@exec_prefix@
+bindir=@bindir@
+datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@
+
+# --- Parse command line ---
+
+mode=x
+out="aclocal.m4"
+in="configure.in"
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+ case $1 in
+ -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+ cat <<EOF
+Usage: mkaclocal [-lx] [-c CONFIG] [-o OUTPUT] [LIBRARY...]
+
+In \`extract' mode (-x, default), constructs an \`aclocal.m4' file containing
+the right macros for the \`configure.in' script CONFIG (by default this is
+\`configure.in'). The output is written to OUTPUT, or \`aclocal.m4' if none
+was specified.
+
+In addition to libraries specified on the command line, the files
+\`aclocal.glob' and \`aclocal.site' contained in the shared file repository,
+and \`aclocal.lib' in the current directory are also searched.
+
+If \`aclocal.lib' contains the string \`*@--TOP--@*', the preceding text is
+written at the top of any output file generated.
+
+In \`list' mode (-l), lists the macros defined in the various libraries.
+
+Options:
+
+-h, --help Print this help text.
+-v, --version Print the program's version number.
+-l, --list List chunks defined in text libraries.
+-x, --extract Extract chunks from text libraries (default).
+-c, --config=CONFIG Read CONFIG, not \`configure.in', to decide which
+ macros need extracting.
+-o, --output=OUTPUT Extract chunks to OUTPUT, not \`aclocal.m4'.
+EOF
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+ version=`echo '$Revision: 1.2 $' |
+ sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+ echo "txtlib $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ -c | --c | --co | --con | --conf | --confi | --config)
+ in="$2";
+ shift
+ ;;
+ -c*)
+ in=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^-[a-z]//'`
+ ;;
+ --c=* | --co=* | --con=* | --conf=* | --confi=* | --config=*)
+ in=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^--[a-z]*=//'`
+ ;;
+ -o | --o | --ou | --out | --outp | --outpu | --output)
+ out="$2";
+ shift
+ ;;
+ -o*)
+ out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^-[a-z]//'`
+ ;;
+ --o=* | --ou=* | --out=* | --outp=* | --outpu=* | --output=*)
+ out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^--[a-z]*=//'`
+ ;;
+ -l | --l | --li | --lis | --list)
+ mode=l
+ ;;
+ -x | --e | --ex | --ext | --extr | --extra | --extrac | --extract)
+ mode=x
+ ;;
+ --)
+ shift
+ break
+ ;;
+ -)
+ break
+ ;;
+ -*)
+ echo "mkaclocal: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+ *)
+ break
+ ;;
+ esac
+ shift
+done
+
+set \
+ "$datadir/aclocal.glob" \
+ `test -r $datadir/aclocal.site && echo "$datadir/aclocal.site"` \
+ `test -r ./aclocal.lib && echo "./aclocal.lib"` \
+ "$@"
+
+# --- Now do the job ---
+
+case $mode in
+
+ l)
+ $bindir/txtlib -l "$@" | sort | uniq
+ ;;
+
+ x)
+ t=/tmp/mkaclocal.$$
+ if mkdir -m 700 $t; then :
+ else
+ echo >&2 "mkaclocal: cculd not creat etemporary directory"
+ exit 1
+ fi
+ echo -NOTICE- >$t/a
+ created=no
+
+ $bindir/txtlib -l "$@" | sort | uniq | while read LINE; do
+ echo "/$LINE/ i\\
+$LINE"
+ done >$t/sed
+
+ until { echo -NOTICE-; sed -n -f $t/sed $in; } | sort | uniq >$t/b
+ cmp -s $t/a $t/b
+ do
+ $bindir/txtlib "$@" <$t/b >$out.tmp
+ in=$out.tmp
+ mv $t/b $t/a
+ created=yes
+ done
+
+ if [ "$created" = "yes" ]; then
+ { test -r ./aclocal.lib &&
+ grep "\*@--TOP--@\*" ./aclocal.lib >/dev/null &&
+ sed -e "/\*@--TOP--@\*/, $ d" ./aclocal.lib
+ cat $out.tmp
+ } >$out
+ else
+ rm -f $out
+ fi
+
+ rm -fr $t $out.tmp
+ ;;
+esac
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+# mkinstalldirs --- make directory hierarchy
+# Author: Noah Friedman <friedman@prep.ai.mit.edu>
+# Created: 1993-05-16
+# Public domain
+
+# $Id: mkinstalldirs,v 1.10 1996/05/03 07:37:52 friedman Exp $
+
+errstatus=0
+
+for file
+do
+ set fnord `echo ":$file" | sed -ne 's/^:\//#/;s/^://;s/\// /g;s/^#/\//;p'`
+ shift
+
+ pathcomp=
+ for d
+ do
+ pathcomp="$pathcomp$d"
+ case "$pathcomp" in
+ -* ) pathcomp=./$pathcomp ;;
+ esac
+
+ if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
+ echo "mkdir $pathcomp" 1>&2
+
+ mkdir "$pathcomp" || lasterr=$?
+
+ if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
+ errstatus=$lasterr
+ fi
+ fi
+
+ pathcomp="$pathcomp/"
+ done
+done
+
+exit $errstatus
+
+# mkinstalldirs ends here
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: mklinks.in,v 1.4 1997/09/11 09:06:34 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Create links to the repository
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log$
+
+# --- Configuration variables ---
+
+prefix=@prefix@
+datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@
+
+# --- Parse command line arguments ---
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+ case $1 in
+ -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+ cat <<EOF
+Usage: mklinks [FILE...]
+
+The FILEs listed are themselves lists of filenames. Makes each named file a
+link to the corresponding file in the shared files repository. With no
+arguments, \`mklinks' reads \`.links' from the current directory.
+EOF
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+ version=`echo '$Revision: 1.4 $' |
+ sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+ echo "mklinks $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ --)
+ shift
+ break
+ ;;
+ -)
+ break
+ ;;
+ -*)
+ echo "mklinks: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+ *)
+ break
+ ;;
+ esac
+ shift
+done
+
+# --- Main code ---
+#
+# This is really trivial.
+
+[ $# = 0 ] && set .links
+cat "$@" | while read name; do
+ base="`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'`"
+ [ -r "$datadir/$base" ] && ln -sf "$datadir/$base" "$name"
+done
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+
+set -e
+mkaclocal || cp aclocal.glob aclocal.m4
+autoconf
+automake
+mkdir build
--- /dev/null
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{1998-11-06}%
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98
+% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo.tex
+% /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
+% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+% ftp://ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+% (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@ctan.org for a list).
+% The texinfo.tex in the texinfo distribution itself could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+%
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.
+% Please include a precise test case in each bug report,
+% including a complete document with which we can reproduce the problem.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For simple
+% manuals, however, you can get away with:
+% tex foo.texi
+% texindex foo.??
+% tex foo.texi
+% tex foo.texi
+% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file.
+% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+ \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined \gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}\fi
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen \bindingoffset
+\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+ \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+ \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\else
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
+ \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+ \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+ \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
+ \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\fi
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+ \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+ %
+ \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+ \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+ %
+ % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+ % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+ \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+ \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+ %
+ {%
+ % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+ % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+ % before the \shipout runs.
+ %
+ \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
+ \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
+ \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+ % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+ \shipout\vbox{%
+ \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+ \hsize = \outerhsize
+ \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \line{%
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+ }%
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin
+ \line\bgroup
+ \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+ \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ %
+ \unvbox\headlinebox
+ \pagebody{#1}%
+ \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+ % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+ % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+ % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+ \vskip 2\baselineskip
+ \unvbox\footlinebox
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifcropmarks
+ \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+ \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+ \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+ \line{%
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+ }%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+ \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+ \fi
+ }% end of \shipout\vbox
+ }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+ \advancepageno
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+ \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+ \let\next = #1%
+ \begingroup
+ \obeylines
+ \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+ % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+ \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+ \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+ \else
+ \expandafter\parseargline
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+ \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+ \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+ %
+ % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+ % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+ \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+ \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+ %
+ % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+ \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+ }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+% @end itemize @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ignoreactivespaces
+ \edef\temp{#1}%
+ \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+ \obeyspaces
+ \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+ \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+ \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+ %
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+ % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+ \else
+ \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+ \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
+% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
+\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
+\def\singlespace{%
+ % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
+ % environments. --karl, 6may93
+ %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
+ %\kern \baselineskip}%
+ \setleading \singlespaceskip
+}
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+ % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
+ \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+ \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+ \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
+ @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
+ @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
+@endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+ \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+ \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+ \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+ \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+ \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+ % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+ % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
+ % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+ % above. But it's pretty close.
+ \def\Egroup{%
+ \egroup % End the \vtop.
+ \endgroup % End the \group.
+ }%
+ %
+ \vtop\bgroup
+ % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+ % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+ % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+ % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
+ % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+ % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+ \everypar = {\strut}%
+ %
+ % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+ % normal interline spacing.
+ \offinterlineskip
+ %
+ % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+ % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+ % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+ % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
+ % empty paragraph.
+ \ifx\par\lisppar
+ \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+ %
+ % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+ \obeylines
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+ % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+ % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
+ % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
+ % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+ % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+ \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+ % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+ % paragraph.
+ \par
+ %
+ % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
+ % break, since the best break might be right here.
+ \allowbreak
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
+ %
+ % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+ % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
+ % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+ % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+ % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
+ %
+ % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+ % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+ % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+ % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+ % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
+ % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+ % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+ \penalty9999
+ %
+ % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+ \kern -#1\mil
+ %
+ % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% @br forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox to 1.5em{%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+ .\hss.\hss.%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+ }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox to 2em{%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+ .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+ }%
+ \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+
+% @page forces the start of a new page
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
+
+\def\inmargin#1{%
+\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
+ \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
+ \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+
+%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% @include file insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\\=12
+ \catcode`~=12
+ \catcode`^=12
+ \catcode`_=12
+ \catcode`|=12
+ \catcode`<=12
+ \catcode`>=12
+ \catcode`+=12
+ \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+ % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+ \def\thisfile{#1}%
+ \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line outputs that line, centered
+
+\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
+\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+\centerline{#1}}}
+
+% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only.
+\let\paragraphindent=\comment
+
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+\let\chapter=\relax
+\let\unnumbered=\relax
+\let\top=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\section=\relax
+\let\subsec=\relax
+\let\subsubsec=\relax
+\let\subsection=\relax
+\let\subsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendix=\relax
+\let\appendixsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\contents=\relax
+\let\smallbook=\relax
+\let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+ \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+ \let\defcv = \relax
+ \let\deffn = \relax
+ \let\deffnx = \relax
+ \let\defindex = \relax
+ \let\defivar = \relax
+ \let\defmac = \relax
+ \let\defmethod = \relax
+ \let\defop = \relax
+ \let\defopt = \relax
+ \let\defspec = \relax
+ \let\deftp = \relax
+ \let\deftypefn = \relax
+ \let\deftypefun = \relax
+ \let\deftypevar = \relax
+ \let\deftypevr = \relax
+ \let\defun = \relax
+ \let\defvar = \relax
+ \let\defvr = \relax
+ \let\ref = \relax
+ \let\xref = \relax
+ \let\printindex = \relax
+ \let\pxref = \relax
+ \let\settitle = \relax
+ \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+ \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+ \let\everyheading = \relax
+ \let\evenheading = \relax
+ \let\oddheading = \relax
+ \let\everyfooting = \relax
+ \let\evenfooting = \relax
+ \let\oddfooting = \relax
+ \let\headings = \relax
+ \let\include = \relax
+ \let\lowersections = \relax
+ \let\down = \relax
+ \let\raisesections = \relax
+ \let\up = \relax
+ \let\set = \relax
+ \let\clear = \relax
+ \let\item = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+%
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+
+% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
+%
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+ % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+ \ignoresections
+ %
+ % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+ % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+ % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+ \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+ %
+ % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+ \catcode32 = 10
+ %
+ % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+ \catcode`\{ = 9
+ \catcode`\} = 9
+ %
+ % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+ \catcode`\@ = 12
+ %
+ % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+ % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+ % @c @end ifinfo
+ % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+ % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+ \catcode`\c = 14
+ %
+ % And now expand that command.
+ \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+ \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+ % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+ % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+ \immediate\write16{}
+ \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+ \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+ \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+ \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+ \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+ \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
+ \immediate\write16{}
+ \global\warnedobstrue
+ \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+ \obstexwarn
+ % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+ % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
+ % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
+ % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+ % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+ %
+ \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+ % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+ \ignoresections
+ %
+ % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+ % @end command again.
+ \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+ %
+ % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
+ % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+ % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+ % undefine them.
+ %
+ % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+ % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+ \ignoremorecommands
+ %
+ % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+ % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
+ % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
+ % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
+ % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+ % stuff compared to the main input.
+ %
+ \nullfont
+ \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont
+ \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
+ \let\tensf = \nullfont
+ % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
+ % smallexample)
+ \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont
+ \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont
+ \let\indsf = \nullfont
+ %
+ % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+ \tracinglostchars = 0
+ %
+ % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+ \frenchspacing
+ %
+ % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+ \hbadness = 10000
+ %
+ % Do minimal line-breaking.
+ \pretolerance = 10000
+ %
+ % Do not execute instructions in @tex
+ \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+ % Do not execute macro definitions.
+ % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+ \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+ \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+ \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+ \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+%
+{
+ \catcode`\_ = \active
+ %
+ % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+ % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
+ % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+ \gdef\value{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
+ \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+ \valuexxx}
+}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
+% winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value
+% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
+% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
+% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+%
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+ \else
+ \csname SET#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
+\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifsetfail
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
+ \fi
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
+\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifclearfail
+ \fi
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
+% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex'
+% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+
+% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
+% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
+% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
+% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
+% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
+% the @ifset might be nested.)
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
+ \edef\temp{%
+ % Remember the current value of \E#1.
+ \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
+ %
+ % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
+ \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
+ }%
+ \temp
+}
+
+% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
+% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+%
+\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math means output in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
+% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then,
+% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
+% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a
+% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+%
+% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
+% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $
+\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+ \iflinks
+ \readauxfile
+ \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+ \openindices
+ \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+ \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+ %
+ % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+ % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+ % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+ \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+ \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+ \closein1
+ \temp
+ %
+ \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+ \newindex{cp}%
+ \newcodeindex{fn}%
+ \newcodeindex{vr}%
+ \newcodeindex{tp}%
+ \newcodeindex{ky}%
+ \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt).
+% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
+% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
+% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
+% aren't very useful.
+\setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\ninettsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\let\indtt=\ninett
+\let\indttsl=\ninettsl
+\let\indsf=\indrm
+\let\indbf=\indrm
+\setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\font\indi=cmmi9
+\font\indsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad.
+% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded.
+% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+
+%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
+%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than
+%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1.
+%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
+%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
+
+%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
+% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
+% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+ \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
+ \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
+ \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+}
+
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+ \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+ \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+ \resetmathfonts}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+ \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+ \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+ \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+ \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+ \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+ \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+ \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+ \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+ \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\indexfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
+ \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
+ \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}}
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+\def\t#1{%
+ {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+ \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+ \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+ \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+ \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+ \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+ \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+ {%
+ % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+ \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+ %
+ % Switch to typewriter.
+ \tt
+ %
+ % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+ \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+ %
+ % Turn off hyphenation.
+ \nohyphenation
+ %
+ \rawbackslash
+ \frenchspacing
+ #1%
+ }%
+ \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+% -- rms.
+{
+ \catcode`\-=\active
+ \catcode`\_=\active
+ %
+ \global\def\code{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+ \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+ \codex
+ }
+ %
+ % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+ % just treat them as a normal -.
+ \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+ \def\arg{#1}%
+ \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+ \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+ \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
+% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
+\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument
+% specifying the text to display. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
+% Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish}
+\def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+ \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})%
+ \else
+ \code{#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref.
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\let\email=\uref
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
+
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @contentsaftertitlepage or @shortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+%
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+ \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+ \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+ \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+ %
+ \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
+ %
+ % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+ \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+ %
+ % Now you can print the title using @title.
+ \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+ \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+ % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+ \finishedtitlepagefalse
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+ % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+ %
+ % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+ \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+ \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+ %
+ % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+ \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+ \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+ {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+ %
+ % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+ % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+ \let\oldpage = \page
+ \def\page{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ \oldpage
+ \let\page = \oldpage
+ \hbox{}}%
+% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+ % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+ % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+ % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+ \oldpage
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+ \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \shortcontents
+ \contents
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \contents
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \fi
+ %
+ \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+ \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+ \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+ \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what @headings on does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+ \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+ %
+ % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
+ % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+ \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+ \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off turns them off.
+% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+\def\today{\number\day\space
+\ifcase\month\or
+January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+\space\number\year}
+
+% Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output.
+%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+%January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+%July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+%\space\number\day, \number\year}
+
+% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings
+% It generates no output of its own
+
+\def\thistitle{No Title}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+ \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+ \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+ \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+ \itemindex{#1}%
+ \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+ %
+ % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+ % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+ % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+ % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+ % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+ \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+ %
+ % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+ % but leave it ragged-right.
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+ \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+ \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+ \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+ % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+ \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+ %
+ % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
+ % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+ % \baselineskip glue.
+ \nobreak
+ \endgroup
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+ \else
+ % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
+ % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+ \noindent
+ % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+ % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+ % eventually be printed.
+ \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+ \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+ \unhbox0
+ \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+ \endgroup
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+ \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+ \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% These are `.?!:;,'
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
+ \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+ \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+ %
+ % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+ \def\thearg{#1}%
+ \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+ %
+ % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
+ % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+ % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+ % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+ % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+ \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+ \ifx\rest\empty
+ % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
+ % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+ % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+ % not equal to itself.
+ % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+ %
+ % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+ % continuing to look for a <number>.
+ %
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+ \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+ \else
+ % It's a letter.
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+ \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+ \else
+ \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
+ \numericenumerate
+ \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \thearg
+ \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}%
+ \fi
+ \char\lccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}
+ \fi
+ \char\uccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+ \advance\itemno by -1
+ \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+% @item ...
+%
+% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+% columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+% @item ...
+% using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+% template}
+% Not:
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+% {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+% @item
+% first col stuff
+% @tab
+% second col stuff
+% @tab
+% third col
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+% @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+% to baseline.
+% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 %
+\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}%
+\setuptable}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}%
+\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax%
+\else
+ \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue%
+ \else
+ \ifsetpercent
+ \let\go\pickupwholefraction % In this case arg of setuptable
+ % is the decimal point before the
+ % number given in percent of hsize.
+ % We don't need this so we don't use it.
+ \else
+ \global\advance\colcount by1
+ \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
+ % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi%
+\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi%
+\fi\go}
+
+% multitable syntax
+\def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96
+ % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is
+ % maintained, even if it is never used.
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+ \vskip\parskip
+ \let\item\crcr
+ \tolerance=9500
+ \hbadness=9500
+ \setmultitablespacing
+ \parskip=\multitableparskip
+ \parindent=\multitableparindent
+ \overfullrule=0pt
+ \global\colcount=0
+ \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
+ %
+ % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+ \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+ %
+ % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+ % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+ % The table preamble
+ % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+ \everycr{\noalign{%
+ %
+ % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+ % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+ % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
+ % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+ \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+ %
+ % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+ % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+ % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+ % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+ \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+ \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+ %
+ % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+ % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+ % the first one.
+ %
+ % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+ % to the width of each template entry.
+ %
+ % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+ % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+ % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
+ % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+ %
+ % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+ \rightskip=0pt
+ \ifnum\colcount=1
+ % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+ \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+ \else
+ \ifsetpercent \else
+ % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+ % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+ \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+ \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+ % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+ % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+ % For example:
+ % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+ % @item @code{#}
+ % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+ % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+ % characters.
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\else
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+ %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+ %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+ \iflinks
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
+ \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
+
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+ \iflinks
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
+}
+
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+
+% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+ \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+ \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+\def\indexdummies{%
+\def\ { }%
+% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
+\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
+\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
+\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
+\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
+\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
+\def\={\realbackslash =}%
+\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
+\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
+\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
+\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
+\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
+\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
+\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
+\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
+\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
+\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
+\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
+\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
+\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
+\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
+\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
+\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
+% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
+% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
+% laboriously list every single command here.)
+\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
+%\let\{ = \lbracecmd
+%\let\} = \rbracecmd
+\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
+\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
+%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
+\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
+\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
+\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
+\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
+\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
+\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
+\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
+\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
+\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
+\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
+\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
+\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
+\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
+\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
+%
+% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
+% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+\let\value = \expandablevalue
+%
+\unsepspaces
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
+% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
+\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+% Just ignore accents.
+\let\,=\indexdummyfont
+\let\"=\indexdummyfont
+\let\`=\indexdummyfont
+\let\'=\indexdummyfont
+\let\^=\indexdummyfont
+\let\~=\indexdummyfont
+\let\==\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\c=\indexdummyfont
+\let\d=\indexdummyfont
+\let\u=\indexdummyfont
+\let\v=\indexdummyfont
+\let\H=\indexdummyfont
+\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{oe}%
+\def\ae{ae}%
+\def\aa{aa}%
+\def\OE{OE}%
+\def\AE{AE}%
+\def\AA{AA}%
+\def\o{o}%
+\def\O{O}%
+\def\l{l}%
+\def\L{L}%
+\def\ss{ss}%
+\let\w=\indexdummyfont
+\let\t=\indexdummyfont
+\let\r=\indexdummyfont
+\let\i=\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
+\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
+\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
+\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
+%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
+%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
+\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
+\let\code=\indexdummyfont
+\let\url=\indexdummyfont
+\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
+\let\env=\indexdummyfont
+\let\command=\indexdummyfont
+\let\option=\indexdummyfont
+\let\file=\indexdummyfont
+\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
+\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
+\let\key=\indexdummyfont
+\let\var=\indexdummyfont
+\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+\let\dots=\indexdummydots
+\def\@{@}%
+}
+
+% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
+% We must first make another character (@) an escape
+% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+ @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+%
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+ % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+ \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+ \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+ \fi
+ {%
+ \count255=\lastpenalty
+ {%
+ \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+ \escapechar=`\\
+ {%
+ \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+ \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+ % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+ %
+ \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+ %
+ % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+ \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
+ \let\subentry = \empty
+ \else
+ \def\subentry{ #3}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off
+ % to get the string to sort by.
+ {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
+ %
+ % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the
+ % original text, including any font commands.
+ \toks0 = {#2}%
+ \edef\temp{%
+ \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+ \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index string.
+ \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+ \toks0 = {#3}%
+ \edef\temp{\temp{\the\toks0}}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+ % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+ % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+ % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
+ % like this:
+ % @end defun
+ % @tindex whatever
+ % @defun ...
+ % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+ % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+ % the previous defun.
+ %
+ % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
+ % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+ %
+ % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+ %
+ \iflinks
+ \ifvmode
+ \skip0 = \lastskip
+ \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
+ \fi
+ %
+ \temp % do the write
+ %
+ %
+ \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \penalty\count255
+ }%
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+% \initial {c}
+% before the first topic whose initial is c
+% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+% for a topic that is used without subtopics
+% \primary {topic}
+% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+% for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+ \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+ %
+ \indexfonts \rm
+ \tolerance = 9500
+ \indexbreaks
+ %
+ % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+ % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+ % \initial {@}
+ % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+ % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+ \catcode`\@ = 11
+ \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+ \ifeof 1
+ % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+ % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+ % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+ % there is some text.
+ (Index is nonexistent)
+ \else
+ %
+ % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+ % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+ % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+ \read 1 to \temp
+ \ifeof 1
+ (Index is empty)
+ \else
+ % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+ % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+ % to make right now.
+ \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+ \catcode`\\ = 0
+ \escapechar = `\\
+ \begindoublecolumns
+ \input \jobname.#1s
+ \enddoublecolumns
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+ % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+ \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+ %
+ % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+ \removelastskip
+ %
+ % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+ \penalty -300
+ %
+ % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
+ % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+ % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+ % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+ %
+ % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+ \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+ \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+ \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+ %
+ % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+ \nobreak
+}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+ %
+ % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+ % affect previous text.
+ \par
+ %
+ % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+ \parfillskip = 0in
+ %
+ % No extra space above this paragraph.
+ \parskip = 0in
+ %
+ % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+ \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+ %
+ % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+ % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
+ % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
+ % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+ % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+ %
+ % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+ % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+ \hangindent = 2em
+ %
+ % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+ % with blank space.
+ \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+ %
+ % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+ \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+ %
+ % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+ % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+ \noindent
+ %
+ % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+ #1%
+ % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+ % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
+ % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+ \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+ \def\tempb{#2}%
+ \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+ \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+ \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+ %
+ % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+ % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+ % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+ \hfil\penalty50
+ \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+ %
+ % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+ % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
+ % \hbox ensues.
+ \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+ \fi%
+ \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+ \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+
+\def\secondary #1#2{
+{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
+\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
+\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+ % Grab any single-column material above us.
+ \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+ %
+ % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+ % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+ % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+ % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
+ % that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from
+ % simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page.
+ % This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it
+ % out. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and
+ % this will be a no-op.
+ \unvbox\partialpage
+ %
+ % Unvbox the main output page.
+ \unvbox255
+ \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+ }}%
+ \eject
+ %
+ % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+ \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+ %
+ % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
+ % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+ % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
+ % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+ % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+ %
+ % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+ % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+ % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
+ % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+ % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+ %
+ % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+ % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+ % been clobbered.
+ %
+ \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+ \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+ \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+ %
+ % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
+ % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+ \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
+ \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+ \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+ % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+ % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+ % previous page.
+ \dimen@ = \vsize
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2
+ %
+ % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+ \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+ \onepageout\pagesofar
+ \unvbox255
+ \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+\def\pagesofar{%
+ % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+ % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+ \advance\vsize by \ht\partialpage
+ \unvbox\partialpage
+ %
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+ \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+ \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+ \output = {%
+ % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave on the
+ % current page, no automatic page break.
+ \balancecolumns
+ %
+ % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+ % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+ % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+ % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+ % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+ % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+ % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+ \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+ %
+ % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+ % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
+ % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
+ \pagegoal = \vsize
+ }%
+ \eject
+ \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+}
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+ % Called at the end of the double column material.
+ \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+ \dimen@ = \ht0
+ \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+ \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+ %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+ \splittopskip = \topskip
+ % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+ {%
+ \vbadness = 10000
+ \loop
+ \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+ \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+ \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+ \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+ \repeat
+ }%
+ %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+ \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+ \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+ %
+ \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Define chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
+\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \chapterzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \appendixzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\the\chapno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \appendixno by 1
+\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\global\let\section = \appendixsec
+\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+%
+% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+% to be executed, not expanded).
+%
+% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
+% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
+% the toc entries.)
+\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+%
+\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
+ {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+ {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+ {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+ {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
+ {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+% overlong headings to fold.
+% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+ \pchapsepmacro
+ {%
+ \chapfonts \rm
+ \def\chapnum{#2}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+ \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+ \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+ }%
+ \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+ \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+ \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+ \leftskip = \rightskip
+ \parfillskip = 0pt
+ }%
+ \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt
+ \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+ \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+ }%
+ {%
+ % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+ \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+ %
+ % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+ \def\secnum{#2}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+ %
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+ \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+ \unhbox0 #3}%
+ }%
+ \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+%
+% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
+% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\writetocentry#1{%
+ \iftocfileopened\else
+ \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+ \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+ \fi
+ \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+ % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+ % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
+ % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+ % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+ \contentsalignmacro
+ \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+ %
+ % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+ % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+ \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+ \savepageno = \pageno
+ \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+ \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
+ % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+ % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
+ %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+ \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+ \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+ %
+ % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+ \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+ \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}%
+ \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \fi
+ \vfill \eject
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+ \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}%
+ %
+ \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+ \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+ % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+ \secfonts
+ \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
+ \rm
+ \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+ \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+ \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+ \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+ \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+ \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+ \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+ \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+ \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \fi
+ \vfill \eject
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+ \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
+
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+ % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
+ % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
+ \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
+ %
+ % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
+ % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+ % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+ % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+ \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
+ \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+ \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+ \begingroup
+ \chapentryfonts
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+ % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
+ % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+ % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+ \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
+\newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox
+\newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox
+\newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox
+
+%{\tentt
+%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
+% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
+%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
+% depth .1ex\hfil}
+%}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+ \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+ \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+ \vbox{
+ \hrule height\dimen2
+ \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
+ \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+ \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+ \hrule height\dimen2}
+ \hfil}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+ \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+ \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+ \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+ \catcode `\%=14
+ \catcode 43=12 % plus
+ \catcode`\"=12
+ \catcode`\==12
+ \catcode`\|=12
+ \catcode`\<=12
+ \catcode`\>=12
+ \escapechar=`\\
+ %
+ \let\b=\ptexb
+ \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+ \let\c=\ptexc
+ \let\,=\ptexcomma
+ \let\.=\ptexdot
+ \let\dots=\ptexdots
+ \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+ \let\!=\ptexexclam
+ \let\i=\ptexi
+ \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+ \let\+=\tabalign
+ \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+ \let\*=\ptexstar
+ \let\t=\ptext
+ %
+ \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+ \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+ \def\@{@}%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\long\def\cartouche{%
+\begingroup
+ \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+ \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+ \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+ \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+ \cartouter=\hsize
+ \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+% side, and for 6pt waste from
+% each corner char, and rule thickness
+ \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+ % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+ \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+ \carttop
+ \hbox\bgroup
+ \hskip\lskip
+ \vrule\kern3pt
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \hsize=\cartinner
+ \kern3pt
+ \begingroup
+ \baselineskip=\normbskip
+ \lineskip=\normlskip
+ \parskip=\normpskip
+ \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+ \endgroup
+ \kern3pt
+ \egroup
+ \kern3pt\vrule
+ \hskip\rskip
+ \egroup
+ \cartbot
+ \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+ \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+ \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+ \singlespace
+ \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+ \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+ \parskip = 0pt
+ \parindent = 0pt
+ \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+ % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+ % at next level down.
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+ \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+ \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+ \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+%
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+ \tt
+ \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+ \gobble % eat return
+}
+
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
+% redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
+% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
+% whatever) command.
+%
+% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
+% @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
+\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
+ \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \indexfonts
+ \lisp
+}
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
+ \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \indexfonts \rm
+ \display
+}
+
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+ \let\nonarrowing = t
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
+ \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \indexfonts \rm
+ \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+ \let\nonarrowing = t
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+ \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+ \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+ {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+ \singlespace
+ \parindent=0pt
+ % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+ % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+ \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+ %
+ % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+ \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+ \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% Define formatter for defuns
+% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
+% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
+\def\activeparens{%
+\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
+\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+ \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+ % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+ \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+ \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\def\ampnr{\&}
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
+% #1 should be the function name.
+% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
+
+\def\defname #1#2{%
+% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
+% outside the @def...
+\dimen2=\leftskip
+\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+\noindent
+\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
+\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
+\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
+% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
+% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
+{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+% so that \rightline will obey them.
+\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
+% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
+\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+{\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
+}
+
+% Actually process the body of a definition
+% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
+% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
+% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
+% such as \defunheader.
+
+\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
+\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
+
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+%
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
+
+% @deftypemethod has an extra argument that nothing else does. Sigh.
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
+%
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
+
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active %
+\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
+
+% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
+% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup\inENV %
+ \medbreak %
+ % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+ % so that it will exit this group.
+ \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+ \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+ \parindent=0in
+ \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+ \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any). That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+ #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% Split up #2 at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+% the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+% the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+
+{\obeylines
+\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
+\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
+\ifx\relax #3%
+#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+
+% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
+% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+
+\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+\hyphenchar\tensl=0
+#1%
+\hyphenchar\tensl=45
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+% at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defunx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+
+\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+
+% @defmethod, and so on
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+
+\def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod CLASS RETURN-TYPE METHOD ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+ \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+ \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+ \defunargs{#3}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
+
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+
+\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
+
+\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now @defvar
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defvarx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
+
+\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
+
+\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+ \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+ \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+ \immediate\write\macscribble{#1}%
+ \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+ \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+ \input \jobname.tmp
+ \endgroup
+}
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1}\endgroup}
+\fi
+
+\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
+
+% Utility routines.
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+ \catcode`\~=12
+ \catcode`\^=12
+ \catcode`\_=12
+ \catcode`\|=12
+ \catcode`\<=12
+ \catcode`\>=12
+ \catcode`\+=12
+ \catcode`\{=12
+ \catcode`\}=12
+ \catcode`\@=12
+ \catcode`\^^M=12
+ \usembodybackslash}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+ \catcode`\~=12
+ \catcode`\^=12
+ \catcode`\_=12
+ \catcode`\|=12
+ \catcode`\<=12
+ \catcode`\>=12
+ \catcode`\+=12
+ \catcode`\@=12
+ \catcode`\\=12}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+ \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+ \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
+ \paramno=0%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
+ \cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+ \else
+ \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+ \fi
+ \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+ \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+ \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+ \fi}
+
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
+\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
+ \errmessage{Macro \the\macname\ not defined.}%
+ \else
+ \cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+ \expandafter\let \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \undefined
+ \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+ \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+ \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+ \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+ \advance\paramno by 1%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+ {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+ \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+ \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+ \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+ \ifrecursive
+ \ifcase\paramno
+ % 0
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \or % 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+ \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \else % many
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\xdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+ \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifcase\paramno
+ % 0
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \or % 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+ \egroup
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \else % many
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\xdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+ \paramlist{%
+ \egroup
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+ \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+ \expandafter\parsearg
+ \fi \next}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+ node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+ {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+ {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\def\anchor#1{\setref{#1}{Ynothing}}
+
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
+% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have
+% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
+% aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
+% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+ \indexdummies
+ \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+ \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+ \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}
+}}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+ \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+ \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+ \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+ % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+ % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \else
+ % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+ % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \else
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+ \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+ \else
+ % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+ % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+ % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
+ % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+ % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+ % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
+ \else
+ % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+ % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+ % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+ % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+ % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+ {\normalturnoffactive
+ % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+ % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+ \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+ \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+ }%
+ % [mynode],
+ [\printednodename],\space
+ % page 3
+ \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+ \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
+
+% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+ {\let\folio=0
+ \normalturnoffactive
+ \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+ \iflinks
+ \next
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
+% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
+
+\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
+
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+
+\def\Ynothing{}
+
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+ \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
+\else
+ \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+ % If not defined, say something at least.
+ \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+ \iflinks
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+ \else
+ \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+ \global\warnedxrefstrue
+ \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % It's defined, so just use it.
+ \csname X#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+ #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
+ % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
+ \catcode`\\ = 0
+ \afterassignment\endgroup
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^@=\other
+ \catcode`\^^A=\other
+ \catcode`\^^B=\other
+ \catcode`\^^C=\other
+ \catcode`\^^D=\other
+ \catcode`\^^E=\other
+ \catcode`\^^F=\other
+ \catcode`\^^G=\other
+ \catcode`\^^H=\other
+ \catcode`\^^K=\other
+ \catcode`\^^L=\other
+ \catcode`\^^N=\other
+ \catcode`\^^P=\other
+ \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+ \catcode`\^^R=\other
+ \catcode`\^^S=\other
+ \catcode`\^^T=\other
+ \catcode`\^^U=\other
+ \catcode`\^^V=\other
+ \catcode`\^^W=\other
+ \catcode`\^^X=\other
+ \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+ \catcode`\^^[=\other
+ \catcode`\^^\=\other
+ \catcode`\^^]=\other
+ \catcode`\^^^=\other
+ \catcode`\^^_=\other
+ \catcode`\@=\other
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+ % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+ % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
+ % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+ % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+ % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+ % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
+ % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+ %
+ % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+ % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+ % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+ %
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \catcode`\[=\other
+ \catcode`\]=\other
+ \catcode`\"=\other
+ \catcode`\_=\other
+ \catcode`\|=\other
+ \catcode`\<=\other
+ \catcode`\>=\other
+ \catcode`\$=\other
+ \catcode`\#=\other
+ \catcode`\&=\other
+ \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+ % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+ {%
+ \count 1=128
+ \def\loop{%
+ \catcode\count 1=\other
+ \advance\count 1 by 1
+ \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
+ % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+ % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+ % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+ % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+ % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+ \catcode`\{=1
+ \catcode`\}=2
+ \catcode`\%=\other
+ \catcode`\'=0
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ %
+ \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ \input \jobname.aux
+ \global\havexrefstrue
+ \global\warnedobstrue
+ \fi
+ % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+ \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+ \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+ \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+ %
+ % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+ % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+ \let\@sf\empty
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+ %
+ % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+ \unskip
+ \thisfootno\@sf
+ \footnotezzz
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+ % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+ % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+ % So reset some parameters.
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+ \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+ \floatingpenalty\@MM
+ \leftskip\z@skip
+ \rightskip\z@skip
+ \spaceskip\z@skip
+ \xspaceskip\z@skip
+ \parindent\defaultparindent
+ %
+ % Hang the footnote text off the number.
+ \hang
+ \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+ %
+ % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
+ % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+ % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+ \footstrut
+ \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
+ \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
+\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
+\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
+\def\@foot{\strut\egroup}
+
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+ \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+ \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+ \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+ depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+ }%
+}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
+% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+ % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+ \leavevmode
+ %
+ % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+ \vadjust{%
+ % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+ % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+ \vskip-\baselineskip
+ %
+ % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
+ % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+ \llap{%
+ %
+ % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+ \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+ %
+ % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+ \hskip 12pt
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
+ % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+ \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+ \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+ work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+ it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+% Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\def\image#1{%
+ \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+ \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+ \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+ \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+ \global\warnednoepsftrue
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
+ \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+ % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+ % If the image is by itself, center it.
+ \ifvmode
+ \nobreak\medskip
+ \nobreak
+ \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
+ \bigbreak
+ \else
+ \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{paper sizes,}
+% And other related parameters.
+
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. We
+% call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+ \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+ % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+ \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+ \else
+ \emergencystretch = \hsize
+ \divide\emergencystretch by 45
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can
+% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \voffset = #3\relax
+ \topskip = #6\relax
+ \splittopskip = \topskip
+ %
+ \vsize = #1\relax
+ \advance\vsize by \topskip
+ \outervsize = \vsize
+ \advance\outervsize by 0.6in
+ \pageheight = \vsize
+ %
+ \hsize = #2\relax
+ \outerhsize = \hsize
+ \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+ \pagewidth = \hsize
+ %
+ \normaloffset = #4\relax
+ \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+ %
+ \parindent = \defaultparindent
+ \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \setleading{13.2pt}%
+ %
+ % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+ \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+ \setleading{12pt}%
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+ %
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+ \tolerance = 700
+ \hfuzz = 1pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \deftypemargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = .5cm
+ %
+ \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
+ \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
+ \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
+ \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \setleading{12pt}%
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ %
+ \tolerance = 700
+ \hfuzz = 1pt
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
+% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \setleading{13.6pt}%
+ %
+ \afourpaper
+ \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+ %
+ \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
+\def\afourwide{%
+ \afourpaper
+ \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+ %
+ \globaldefs = 0
+}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+ \globaldefs = 1
+ %
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \setleading{13.2pt}%
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+%\catcode 27=\active
+%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+%{\catcode`\\=\other
+%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+
+% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+\escapechar=`\@
+
+% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@realbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@normalbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+ @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below
+% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
+@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
+
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
--- /dev/null
+@tex % -*-tex-*-
+%
+% $Id: texinice.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+%
+% Make Texinfo printed output look nice
+%
+% (c) 1998 Mark Wooding
+%
+
+%----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+% it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+% the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+% (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this file; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+% Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+%----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% $Log: texinice.tex,v $
+% Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+
+\global\parskip = 10pt
+\global\parindent = 0pt
+\global\defaultparindent = 0pt
+
+\global\smallskipamount = 6pt
+
+\gdef\afourpaper{
+ \global\tolerance=700
+ \global\hfuzz=1pt
+ \setleading{12pt}
+ \global\topskip = 36pt
+ %%% NO!!! \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt
+
+ \global\vsize= 53\baselineskip
+ \global\advance\vsize by \topskip
+ \global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt
+ %\global\hsize= 6.5in
+ \global\outerhsize=\hsize
+ \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+ \global\outervsize=\vsize
+ \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in
+
+ \global\pagewidth=\hsize
+ \global\pageheight=\vsize
+}
+
+\global\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+
+\global\font\textrm = pplr7t at 10pt
+\global\font\texttt = pcrr7tn at 10pt
+\global\font\textbf = pplb7t at 10pt
+\global\font\textit = pplri7t at 10pt
+%\global\font\textsl = pplro7t at 10pt
+\global\let\textsl = \textit
+\global\font\textsc = pplrc7t at 10pt
+\global\font\textsf = phvr7t at 10pt
+\global\font\textttsl = pcrro7t at 10pt
+
+\global\let\defbf = \textbf
+\global\let\deftt = \texttt
+
+\global\font\ninett = pcrr7tn at 9pt
+\global\font\indrm = pplr7t at 9pt
+\global\font\intit = pplri7t at 9pt
+%\global\font\indsl = pplro7t at 9pt
+\global\let\indsl = \indit
+\global\let\indtt = \ninett
+\global\let\indttsl = \ninett
+\global\let\indsf = \indrm
+\global\let\indbf = \indrm
+\global\font\indsc = pplrc7t at 9pt
+
+\global\font\chaprm = phvb7t at 14.4pt
+\global\font\chapsl = phvbo7t at 14.4pt
+\global\let\chapit = \chapsl
+\global\font\chaptt = pcrb7t at 14.4pt
+\global\font\chapttsl = pcrbo7t at 14.4pt
+\global\let\chapsf = \chaprm
+\global\font\chapsc = phvbc7t at 14.4pt
+\global\let\chapbf = \chaprm
+
+\global\font\secrm = phvb7t at 12pt
+\global\font\secsl = phvbo7t at 12pt
+\global\let\secit = \secsl
+\global\font\sectt = pcrb7t at 12pt
+\global\font\secttsl = pcrbo7t at 12pt
+\global\let\secsf = \secrm
+\global\font\secsc = phvbc7t at 12pt
+\global\let\secbf = \secrm
+
+\global\font\ssecrm = phvb7t at 10pt
+\global\font\ssecsl = phvbo7t at 10pt
+\global\let\ssecit = \ssecsl
+\global\font\ssectt = pcrb7t at 10pt
+\global\font\ssecttsl = pcrbo7t at 10pt
+\global\let\ssecsf = \ssecrm
+\global\font\ssecsc = phvbc7t at 10pt
+\global\let\ssecbf = \ssecrm
+
+\global\font\titlerm = phvb7t at 20pt
+\global\let\authorrm = \secrm
+
+% \gdef\var#1{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\textit#1\/$\rangle$}}
+
+%----- That's all, folks ----------------------------------------------------
+
+@end tex
+@textfonts
+@textrm
+@raggedbottom
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: txtlib.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Manipulate simple libraries of text chunks
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log: txtlib.in,v $
+# Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw
+# Initial revision
+#
+
+# --- Handle command line arguments ---
+
+files=""
+mode=x
+out=""
+
+# --- Parse command line arguments ---
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+ case $1 in
+ -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+ cat <<EOF
+Usage: txtlib [-lx] [-o FILE] [LIBRARY...]
+
+In \`extract' mode (-x, default), extracts chunks named on standard input
+from the list of libraries, and writes the result to standard output.
+
+In \`list' mode (-l), lists the chunks defined in the text libraries given.
+
+Options:
+
+-h, --help Print this help text.
+-v, --version Print the program's version number.
+-l, --list List chunks defined in text libraries.
+-x, --extract Extract chunks from text libraries (default).
+-o, --output=FILE Extract chunks to FILE, not standard output.
+EOF
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+ version=`echo '$Revision: 1.1 $' |
+ sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+ echo "txtlib $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ -o | --o | --ou | --out | --outp | --outpu | --output)
+ out="$2";
+ shift
+ ;;
+ -o*)
+ out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^-[a-z]//'`
+ ;;
+ --o=* | --ou=* | --out=* | --outp=* | --outpu=* | --output=*)
+ out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^--[a-z]*=//'`
+ ;;
+ -l | --l | --li | --lis | --list)
+ mode=l
+ ;;
+ -x | --e | --ex | --ext | --extr | --extra | --extrac | --extract)
+ mode=x
+ ;;
+ --)
+ shift
+ break
+ ;;
+ -)
+ break
+ ;;
+ -*)
+ echo "txtlib: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+ exit 1
+ ;;
+ *)
+ break
+ ;;
+ esac
+ shift
+done
+
+test "$out" = "-" && out=""
+
+# --- Build a `sed' script ---
+
+case $mode in
+ l)
+ sed -n -e "/^.*\*@-\([-a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)-@\*.*$/ s//\1/p" "$@"
+ ;;
+ x)
+ t=/tmp/txtlib.$$
+ if mkdir -m 700 $t; then :
+ else
+ echo >&2 "txtlib: could not create temporary directory"
+ exit 1
+ fi
+ sedfile=/$t/sed
+ while read LINE; do
+ echo "/\*@-$LINE-@\*/,/\*@-#-@\*/ p"
+ done >$sedfile
+ test -z "$out" || exec >$out
+ sed -e '/\*@-[-a-zA-Z0-9_]*-@\*/ i\
+ *@-#-@*' "$@" | sed -n -f $sedfile | sed -e '/\*@-#-@\*/ d'
+ rm -rf $t
+ ;;
+esac
--- /dev/null
+#! /bin/sh
+# ylwrap - wrapper for lex/yacc invocations.
+# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Written by Tom Tromey <tromey@cygnus.com>.
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# Usage:
+# ylwrap PROGRAM INPUT [OUTPUT DESIRED]... -- [ARGS]...
+# * PROGRAM is program to run.
+# * INPUT is the input file
+# * OUTPUT is file PROG generates
+# * DESIRED is file we actually want
+# * ARGS are passed to PROG
+# Any number of OUTPUT,DESIRED pairs may be used.
+
+# The program to run.
+prog="$1"
+shift
+
+# The input.
+input="$1"
+shift
+case "$input" in
+ /*)
+ # Absolute path; do nothing.
+ ;;
+ *)
+ # Relative path. Make it absolute. Why? Because otherwise any
+ # debugging info in the generated file will point to the wrong
+ # place. This is really gross.
+ input="`pwd`/$input"
+ ;;
+esac
+
+pairlist=
+while test "$#" -ne 0; do
+ if test "$1" = "--"; then
+ break
+ fi
+ pairlist="$pairlist $1"
+ shift
+done
+
+# FIXME: add hostname here for parallel makes that run commands on
+# other machines. But that might take us over the 14-char limit.
+dirname=ylwrap$$
+trap "cd `pwd`; rm -rf $dirname > /dev/null 2>&1" 1 2 3 15
+mkdir $dirname || exit 1
+
+cd $dirname
+$prog ${1+"$@"} "$input"
+status=$?
+
+if test $status -eq 0; then
+ set X $pairlist
+ shift
+ first=yes
+ while test "$#" -ne 0; do
+ if test -f "$1"; then
+ # If $2 is an absolute path name, then just use that,
+ # otherwise prepend `../'.
+ case "$2" in
+ /*) target="$2";;
+ *) target="../$2";;
+ esac
+ mv "$1" "$target" || status=$?
+ else
+ # A missing file is only an error for the first file. This
+ # is a blatant hack to let us support using "yacc -d". If -d
+ # is not specified, we don't want an error when the header
+ # file is "missing".
+ if test $first = yes; then
+ status=1
+ fi
+ fi
+ shift
+ shift
+ first=no
+ done
+else
+ status=$?
+fi
+
+# Remove the directory.
+cd ..
+rm -rf $dirname
+
+exit $status
~mdw / cfd / commitdiff